Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend Data Multiplexer Installation Manual

Power cable assemblies .............................................................................................................. 2-16

Power connections ...................................................................................................................... 2-16

Cable and fiber installation

Cable requirements and options ................................................................................................... 3-3

DS1/E1 cable assemblies ............................................................................................................. 3-9

DS1 transmission connections ................................................................................................... 3-11

DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies ....................................................................................................... 3-17

Twenty-four cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections ........................................................... 3-24

Twelve cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections .................................................................... 3-28

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable assemblies ....................................................................................... 3-33

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS3 transmission connections ....................................................... 3-35

3-9 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS1 transmission connections ....................................................... 3-35

3-10 10/100Base-T Ethernet cable assemblies ................................................................................... 3-38

3-11 10/100BaseT Ethernet connections ............................................................................................ 3-39

3-12 GbE ethernet cables .................................................................................................................... 3-40

3-13 LAN 10BaseT cable assemblies ................................................................................................. 3-42

3-14 LAN 10Base-T cross-over cable connections ............................................................................ 3-44

3-15 LAN 10Base-T straight-through cable connections ................................................................... 3-44

3-16 Modem cable assemblies ............................................................................................................ 3-45

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 v i i

List of tables

3-17 Modem cable connections .......................................................................................................... 3-46

3-18 Synchronization cable assemblies (SYNC1 and SYNC2) ......................................................... 3-49

3-19 Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections ...................................................... 3-50

3-20 Office alarm cable assemblies .................................................................................................... 3-53

3-21 Alarm office connections ........................................................................................................... 3-53

3-22 Miscellaneous discrete cable assemblies ................................................................................... 3-57

3-23 Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry connections ................................................ 3-57

3-24 CIT Cable Assembly .................................................................................................................. 3-64

3-25 Standard CIT cable connection .................................................................................................. 3-65

3-26 RJ-45 to DB-9 connector connections ....................................................................................... 3-65

Circuit pack installation

4-1

4-2

4-3

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf power supply requirements .............................................. 4-2

R9.1 circuit pack slot compatibility ............................................................................................. 4-6

OC-3 mains with 6 STS-1s of vt switch fabric ............................................................................ 4-8

4-4

4-5

4-6

OC-12 mains with 12 STS-1s of vt switch fabric ........................................................................ 4-8

OC-48 Mains with 48 STS-1s of vt switch fabric ........................................................................ 4-9

OC-192 circuit packs with 192 STS-1s of vt switch fabric (VLF) .............................................. 4-9

4-7

4-8

OC3/12/48 circuit packs with 192 STS-1s of vt switch fabric (VLF) ......................................... 4-9

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf ........................................................................................... 4-9

Stand-alone node setup

Stand-alone installation testing

6-1

6-2

Office alarm connections ........................................................................................................... 6-40

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry connections ................................................ 6-56

Connecting adjacent network elements

7-1 Attenuation table .......................................................................................................................... 7-6

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

8-1 Channel/port assignments .......................................................................................................... 8-13

8-2

8-3

8-4

XM10G/8 PTM port guidelines ................................................................................................. 8-14

Channel/port assignments ......................................................................................................... 8-19

Attenuation Table ....................................................................................................................... 8-19

Fiber cleaning

A-1 Required and recommended equipment and materials ................................................................A-2

v i i i

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

List of tables

B Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

B-1 Alcatel-Lucent approved PTMs ...................................................................................................B-2

C Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

C-1 Circuit pack attenuation table .......................................................................................................C-4

C-2 PTM attenuation table ..................................................................................................................C-5

C-3 LBOs based on attenuation ..........................................................................................................C-7

Backplane pin replacement

D-1 Backplane locations of METRAL™ pins ................................................................................... D-3

D-2 Metral™ pins .............................................................................................................................. D-3

Fiber labeling

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 i x

List of tables

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

List of figures

Safety

1-1 Static control wrist strap ............................................................................................................... 1-5

Physical installation

Shelf mount rear cover kit 849001367 ......................................................................................... 2-3

Bay mount rear cover kit 849001060 ........................................................................................... 2-4

Center divider ............................................................................................................................... 2-6

Center divider with circuit packs installed. .................................................................................. 2-7

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend mounting bracket positions - 23-Inch/19-Inch frame ............. 2-10

Fiber duct mounting ................................................................................................................... 2-11

Safety ground screw. .................................................................................................................. 2-12

Fiber spools ................................................................................................................................ 2-13

Power connection ....................................................................................................................... 2-14

Cable and fiber installation

3-1 Connector types and pinouts ........................................................................................................ 3-5

3-2

3-3

DS1/E1 cable connectors ............................................................................................................. 3-7

DS1/E1 cable routing to the right ................................................................................................. 3-8

DS1/E1 cable routing to the left ................................................................................................... 3-8

DS3/EC-1 cable connections ..................................................................................................... 3-15

DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the right .......................................................................................... 3-15

DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the left ............................................................................................ 3-16

3-8

3-9

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable connections ..................................................................................... 3-31

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable routing ........................................................................................... 3-31

3-10 10/100BASE-T/TX cable connections ....................................................................................... 3-37

3-11 10/100BASE-T cable routing ..................................................................................................... 3-37

3-12 IAO LAN/TCP-IP cable connection to rear of Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend ...................... 3-42

3-13 Modem cable connection .......................................................................................................... 3-45

3-14 Sync cable connections .............................................................................................................. 3-47

3-15 Office alarm cable connections .................................................................................................. 3-51

3-16 Office alarm cable routing .......................................................................................................... 3-51

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 x i

List of figures

3-17 Miscellaneous discrete cable connection .................................................................................. 3-55

3-18 Miscellaneous discrete cable routing ........................................................................................ 3-55

3-19 Optical fiber routing .................................................................................................................. 3-60

Circuit pack installation

4-1 Power connections on Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane .............................................. 4-4

Stand-alone node setup

Stand-alone installation testing

6-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf backplane ....................................................................... 6-52

6-2 Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete functions ................................................................... 6-55

Connecting adjacent network elements

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

Fiber cleaning

A-1 Cleaning the ferrule endface ........................................................................................................A-4

A-2 CLETOP cleaner ..........................................................................................................................A-5

A-3 Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning .....................................................................................A-7

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

B-1 Pluggable optics module ..............................................................................................................B-8

B-2 Module types ................................................................................................................................B-9

B-3 Latch type 3 ...............................................................................................................................B-11

B-4 Latch type 4 ................................................................................................................................B-11

B-5 Electrical PTM routing ..............................................................................................................B-14

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

C-1 LC-type connector ports on circuit pack ......................................................................................C-2

C-2 LC-type LBO ...............................................................................................................................C-3

C-3 LC-type LBO inserted into LC-type connector port ...................................................................C-3

C-4 Removing LC-type LBO from LC-type connector port ..............................................................C-4

C-5 LC-type fiber connector ...............................................................................................................C-8

C-6 LC-type fiber connection .............................................................................................................C-8

Backplane pin replacement

Fiber labeling

x i i

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

About this document

Purpose

This document provides the information and procedures necessary to install, self-test and turn up Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend).

Reason for reissue

•

This document is being issued to include information about new features and hardware associated with Release 9.1including:

LNW7 to LNW801 DS1 capacity upgrade

LNW8 and LNW801 can exist in the same function group

Change the initial default state of an external timing reference from Auto to IS

Bi-directional ALS on LNW63/64/70/74/87/170

FEC is provisionable on LNW705

•

Additional buffer sizes for FE and GigE for LNW63/70/74/170

In TL1 cut-through, the last TID specified is remembered and used in all subsequent commands.

Optional OOS check for loopback on an Ethernet, T3, or T1 signals

Ethernet loopbacks are allowed even when RCF or FEFI are active

Windows

7 64-bit, support on WaveStar

CIT

Intended audience

This installation manual is intended to provide individuals and customers the information and procedures necessary to install, self-test and turn up the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend system.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 xiii

About this document

This manual is not a service or operations manual. For any activities involving circuit turnup, regular maintenance, or trouble analysis, refer to:

•

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide,

365-372-325

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Maintenance and Trouble

Clearing Guide, 365-372-326

\How to use this document

This manual is divided into the following sections with a brief description of the contents of each major part/chapter/appendix:

About this document

This chapter describes the purpose, intended audience, reason for reissue, and organization of this document. This section references related documentation and explains how to order, make comments or recommend changes to this document.

Chapter 1, “Safety”

This chapter provides laser safety information and precautions.

Part I: “Physical and power installation”

Part I covers Chapters 2, 3, and 4. These sections covers the physical mounting of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using the Horizontal Bay Mount. This section includes the running and connecting of power cables, interconnecting cables, alarm cables, and as required, external timing, communication cables, and covers initial circuit pack installation (not seated). This section also provides the recommended checklist

Table

I-2 “Installation checklist” to follow when installing a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

system. Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why. This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Chapter 2, “Physical installation”

This chapter provides equipment installation instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf using the horizontal bay mount configuration. The Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelves with the removable center divider can support either half width or full width cards in the Main function slots.

Chapter 3, “Cable and fiber installation”

This chapter provides cabling instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using the horizontal bay mount configuration.

xiv

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

About this document

Chapter 4, “Circuit pack installation”

This chapter provides information for verifying that the shelf is being supplied with the proper power and provides instructions for circuit pack installation.

Part II: “Stand-alone installation tests”

Part II covers Chapters 5 and 6. These sections cover the initial Graphical User Interface

(GUI) or Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) software installation and turn-up testing on a new

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. It is intended to verify correct electrical

DS1/DS3/FE cable wiring to the DSX panel or punch down block as well SONET fiber routing to the LGX panel from the faceplates of installed packs. This section also the recommended checklist

“Installation checklist” to follow when installing a Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) system. Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why.

This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Chapter 5, “Stand-alone node setup”

This chapter provides procedures for initial Graphical User Interface (GUI) or Craft

Interface Terminal (CIT) software installation and circuit packs provided via work order.

Also, the use of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) or Craft Interface Terminal (CIT).

Chapter 6, “Stand-alone installation testing”

This chapter is to verify proper transmission cabling installation and R9.1 functionality as well as the associated functionality of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Part III: “Network turn-up and testing”

Part III covers fiber connections between nodes in a ring. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures. This section also provides the recommended checklist

“Installation checklist” to follow when installing a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend system.

Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why. This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Chapter 7, “Connecting adjacent network elements”

This chapter is used to make fiber connections between nodes in a ring. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 xv

About this document

Chapter 8, “WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures”

This chapter is used to verify WDMX connectivity between Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) nodes. The chapter includes the

LNW785 8 channel Optical Multiplexer Demultiplexer (OMD) circuit pack. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures.

Part IV: “Miscellaneous detailed installation procedure and reference material”

Part IV provides supplementary information that is useful when installing the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend system and using this Installation Manual.

Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

Appendix B, “Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation”

This appendix provides examples of PTM installation.

Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

This appendix provides procedures for installing and removing the types of Line Build

Out units (LBOs) and fiber connectors onto input and output ports found on the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend circuit packs.

Appendix D, “Backplane pin replacement”

This appendix provides information and the procedures used when a pin or blade on the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane has been bent or broken.

Appendix E, “Fiber labeling”

This appendix describes the labeling of the fiber.

Glossary

The Glossary provides definitions for telecommunication acronyms and terms.

Index

The Index supplies users with specific subjects and corresponding page numbers to find necessary information.

xvi

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

About this document

Safety information

This information product contains hazard statements for your safety. Hazard statements are given at points where safety consequences to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to follow these statements may result in serious consequences.

•

Safety precautions

Adhere to the following safety precautions:

Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

•

You must be properly grounded when making contact with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend frame and handling circuit packs, disk drives, and tapes. Wrist strap ground cords should be routinely tested for the minimum 1-megohm resistance.

Plug-in storage

Circuit packs should be stored in static-safe packaging or in a grounded cabinet.

For additional safety precautions, please see the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer

Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide, 365-372-325.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

When connecting fiber loops between the IN and OUT ports on optical circuit packs, always connect to the IN port first and then the OUT port. This will prevent any optical radiation from being present at the fiber end.For more detailed information and safety precautions, see

Electrostatic discharge ESD considerations

Conventions used

Italic typeface denotes a particular product line or information product.

Arial Bold

typeface signifies a window, section, command or parameter used with the

Graphical User Interface

Helvetica typeface indicates a faceplate or Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend label designation, as in the ACTIVE LED on a circuit pack.

Courier Bold

indicates a TL1 command typed in a terminal window by the user, as in

act-user:LT-DMXTEND:LUC01:ctag::DMXTND2.5G;

Courier

typeface indicates the system or PC response to a command.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend Documentation Set

The following table lists the documents included in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend documentation set.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 xvii

About this document

Table 1 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend documentation set

Document number/Comcode

365-372-330

365-372-324R9.1

365-372-325R9.1

365-372-326R9.1

365-372-327R9.1

365-372-328R9.1

ED8C951-10

ED8C951-20

109783654

109783464

109783472

Title

WaveStar

CIT User Guide

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Applications and Planning Guide

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) User Operations Guide

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Alarm Messages and Trouble Clearing

Guide

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Installation Manual

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) TL1 Message Details

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Engineering and Ordering Information

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Interconnect Information

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Customer Release Notes

(PDF)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Customer Release Notes

(CD-ROM)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Customer Documentation

CD-ROM

Technical support

For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the

Alcatel-Lucent Support web site ( http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support ) for contact information.

xviii

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

About this document

How to order

To order Alcatel-Lucent documents contact your local sales representative or use Online

Customer Support (OLCS) ( https://support.alcatel-lucent.com

How to comment

To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form ( http://infodoc.alcatellucent.com/comments ) or email your comments to the Comments Hotline

( [email protected]

Packaging collection and recovery requirements

Countries, states, localities, or other jurisdictions may require that systems be established for the return and/or collection of packaging waste from the consumer, or other end user, or from the waste stream. Additionally, reuse, recovery, and/or recycling targets for the return and/or collection of the packaging waste may be established.

For more information regarding collection and recovery of packaging and packaging waste within specific jurisdictions, please contact the Alcatel-Lucent Services -

Environmental Health and Safety organization.

Material content compliance

European Union RoHS

European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC, “Restriction of the use of certain

Hazardous Substances” (RoHS), restricts the use of lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, and certain flame retardants in electrical and electronic equipment.

This Directive applies to electrical and electronic products placed on the EU market after

1 July 2006, with various exemptions, including an exemption for lead solder in network infrastructure equipment. Alcatel-Lucent products shipped to the EU after 1 July 2006 comply with the EU RoHS Directive.

China RoHS

The Peoples Republic of China Ministry of Information Industry has published a regulation (Order #39) and associated standards regarding restrictions on hazardous substances (China RoHS). Currently, the legislation requires all Electronic and

Information Products (EIP) to comply with certain labeling and documentation requirements. Alcatel-Lucent products manufactured on or after 1 March 2007, that are intended for sale to customers in the China market, comply with these requirements.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011 xix

About this document

In accordance with the People’s Republic of China Electronic Industry Standard “Marking for the Control of Pollution Caused by Electronic Information Product” (SJ/T11364-

2006), customers may access Alcatel-Lucent’s Hazardous Substances Table information at either of the following two URLs (for the convenience of our diverse customer base):

•

Access via the Alcatel-Lucent Corporate website at: http://www.alcatelsbell.com.cn/live/home/index.jsp ( http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/

•

Access via the Alcatel Shanghai Bell website at: http://www.alcatelsbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/private/1/media/ China-RoHS-HST-3.1.pdf

( http://www.alcatel-sbell.com.cn/wwwroot/images/upload/

Recycling/take-back/disposal of product

Electronic products bearing or referencing the symbols shown below shall be collected and treated at the end of their useful life, in compliance with applicable European Union and other local legislation. They shall not be disposed of as part of unsorted municipal waste. Due to materials that may be contained in the product and batteries, such as heavy metals, the environment and human health may be negatively impacted as a result of inappropriate disposal.

Note:

For electronic products put on the market in the European Union, a solid bar under the crossed-out wheeled bin indicates that the product was put on the market.

Moreover, in compliance with legal requirements and contractual agreements, where applicable, Alcatel-Lucent will offer to provide for the collection and treatment of Alcatel-

Lucent products bearing the logo at the end of their useful life, or products. For information regarding take-back, recycling, or disposal of equipment by Alcatel-Lucent or for equipment take-back requests, visit the Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back web page

( http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/product_takeback ) or contact Alcatel-Lucent Take-Back

Support ( [email protected]

). For technical information on product treatment, consult the Alcatel-Lucent Recycling Information web page .

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1 Safety

Overview

Purpose

This chapter provides important safety instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend).

Contents

This appendix provides information on the following topics:

Laser safety

Laser product classification

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend optical specifications

Laser safety

System design

The Alcatel-Lucent system complies with FDA/CDRH 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 as a

Class I and with IEC 60825-1 as a Class 1 Optical Fiber Telecommunication laser product.

The system has been designed to ensure that the operating personnel is not endangered by laser radiation during normal system operation. The safety measures specified in the Food and Drug Administration’s Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/CDRH) regulations and the international standards IEC-60825 or DIN/EN 60825 are met. Please also see

“Laser product classification” (p. 1-9) .

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-1

Safety

Potential sources of danger

Beware of the following potential sources of danger which will remain despite all safety measures taken:

•

Laser radiation can cause damage to the skin and eyes.

Laser radiation from optical transmission systems is in a wavelength range that is invisible to the human eye.

Laser warning labels

The laser warning labels indicate either only the laser class or both the laser class and the maximum output power of laser radiation. The following figure shows different types of laser warning labels and their characteristics.

CLASS 1 LASER

PRODUCT

HAZARD

LEVEL

DANGER

INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN AND FIBER

DISCONNECTED

Avoid direct exposure to beam

Do not view beam directly with optical instruments

CAUTION

CLASS 1M INVISIBLE

LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN

AND FIBER

DISCONNECTED.

Do not view directly with optical instruments.

ATTENTION

RAYONNEMENT

LASER DE CLASSE

1M INVISIBLE

LORSQUE

L’APPAREIL EST

OUVERT ET QUE

LA FIBRE EST

Ne pas regarder directement au moyen d’un instrument optique.

848950572

1-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Legend

1. Laser symbol.

2. Laser classification label. This label may show only the laser class or both the laser class and the maximum output power.

3. Laser warning label.

Laser safety instructions

Observe the following instructions to avoid exposing yourself and others to risk.

•

Read the relevant descriptions in the manuals before taking equipment into operation or carrying out any installation and maintenance work on the optical port units, and follow the instructions. Ignoring the instructions can result in exposure to dangerous radiation.

Do not view directly into the laser beam with optical instruments such as a fiber microscope, because viewing of laser emission in excess of Class 1 limits significantly increases the risk of eye damage.

Never look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector as long as the optical source is still switched on.

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

In the event of doubt, check that the optical source is switched off by measuring with an optical power meter.

Electrostatic discharge ESD considerations

ESD precautions

CAUTION

ESD hazard

Industry experience has shown that all integrated circuit packs can be damaged by static electricity that builds up on work surfaces and personnel. The static charges are produced by various charging effects of movement and contact with other objects. Dry air allows greater static charges to accumulate. Higher potentials are measured in areas with low relative humidity, but potentials high enough to cause damage can occur anywhere.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-3

Safety

In order to prevent damage by electrostatic discharge the following precautions should be observed when handling circuit packs:

•

Assume all circuit packs contain solid state electronic components that can be damaged by ESD.

•

When handling circuit packs (storing, inserting, removing, etc.) or when working on the backplane, always wear a grounded wrist strap such as the one shown in

Figure 1-1, “Static control wrist strap” (p. 1-5)

or wear a heel strap and stand on a grounded, static dissipating floor mat. If a static dissipating floor mat is used, be sure that it is clean to ensure a good discharge path.

•

Handle all circuit packs by the faceplate or latch and by the top and bottom outermost edges. Never touch the components, conductors, or connector pins.

Observe warning labels on bags and cartons. Whenever possible, do not remove circuit packs from antistatic packaging until ready to insert them into slots.

•

If possible, open all circuit packs at a static safe work position, using properly grounded wrist straps and static dissipating table mats. If a static dissipating floor mat is used, be sure that it is clean to ensure a good discharge path.

Always store and transport circuit packs in static safe packaging. Shielding is not required unless specified.

Keep all static generating materials such as food wrappers, plastics, and styrofoam containers away from all circuit packs. Upon removal from bay, immediately put circuit packs into static safe packages.

Whenever possible, maintain relative humidity above 20 percent.

To reduce the possibility of ESD damage, assemblies are equipped with grounding jacks

to enable personnel to ground themselves using wrist straps [ Figure 1-1, “Static control wrist strap” (p. 1-5) ] while handling circuit packs or working on an assembly. The jacks

for connection of wrist straps are located at the lower right-hand corner of each assembly and are labeled. When grounding jacks are not provided, an alligator clip adapter enables connection to bay frame ground.

1-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Figure 1-1 Static control wrist strap

GROUND

CONNECTION

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-5

Safety

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL INSTRUCTIONS

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying this product.

When installing, operating, or maintaining this equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons, including the following:

1. Read and understand all instructions.

2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on this product.

3. This product should be only operated from the type of power sources indicated on the marking label.

4. Connect this product only to the type of power sources recommended by Alcatel-

Lucent. For information on the powering instructions, consult the Installation Manual.

5. This equipment is suitable for mounting on a concrete or other noncombustible surface only.

6. For information on proper mounting instructions, consult the Installation Manual.

7. Install only equipment identified in the Installation Manual. Use of other equipment may result in improper connection of circuitry leading to fire or injury to persons.

8. All metallic telecommunication interfaces should not leave the building premises unless connected to telecommunication devices providing primary and secondary protection, as applicable.

9. Do not use this product near water, for example, in a wet basement.

10. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. The product may fall, causing serious damage to the product.

11. Use caution when installing or modifying telecommunications lines.

12. Never install telecommunications wiring during a lightning storm.

13. Never install telecommunications connections in wet locations.

14. Never touch uninsulated telecommunications wires or terminals unless the telecommunications line has been disconnected at the network interface.

15. Never touch uninsulated wiring or terminals carrying direct current or ringing current, or leave this wiring exposed. Protect and tape uninsulated wiring and terminals to avoid risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to service personnel.

16. Never push objects of any kind into this product through slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or electrical shock. Never spill liquids of any kind on the product.

1-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

17. Slots and openings in the unit are provided for ventilation, to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided.

18. To reduce the risk of an electrical shock, do not disassemble this product. Service should be performed by trained personnel only. Opening or removing covers and/or circuit boards may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly can cause electrical shock when the unit is subsequently used.

19. Some of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend) hardware modules contain FDA/CDRH Class I/IEC Class 1 single-mode laser products that are enclosed lightwave transmission systems. Under normal operating conditions, lightwave transmission systems are completely enclosed; nonetheless, the following precautions must be observed because of the potential for eye damage:

•

Do not disconnect any lightwave cable or splice and stare into the optical connectors terminating the cables.

Lightwave/lightguide operations should not be performed by a technician who has not satisfactorily completed an approved training course.

•

Do not use optical instruments such as an eye loupe to view a fiber or unterminated connector.

More information about laser safety can be found in the Installation Manual.

•

20. For a unit intended to be powered from –48 V dc voltage sources, read and understand the following:

•

To be powered only by Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV) -48 V dc Sources.

•

Disconnect up to Two (2) power supply connections when removing power from the system.

•

This equipment must be provided with a readily accessible disconnect device as part of the building installation.

Ensure that there is no exposed wire when the input power cables are connected to the unit.

Installation must include an independent frame ground drop to building ground.

See Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User Operations

Guide, 365-372-325

This symbol is marked on the product, adjacent to the ground (earth) area for the connection of the ground (earth) conductor.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-7

Safety

•

This Equipment is to be Installed Only in Restricted Access Areas on Business and

Customer Premises Applications in Accordance with Articles 110-16, 110-17, and

110-18 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No. 70. Other Installations

Exempt from the Enforcement of the National Electrical Code May Be Engineered

According to the Accepted Practices of the Local Telecommunications Utility.

21. For a unit intended to be powered from 100-120/200-240 V ac voltage sources, read and understand the following:

•

Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.

Do not staple or otherwise attach the power supply cord to the building surfaces.

•

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

•

The socket outlet should be installed near the equipment and should be readily accessible.

This product is equipped with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug having a third (grounding) pin. This plug is intended to fit only into a grounding type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the grounding type plug. Do not use a 3-to-2-prong adapter at the receptacle. Use of this type adapter may result in risk of electrical shock and/or damage to this product.

•

Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the cord may be abused by persons walking on it.

Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a. When the powers supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.

b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.

c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.

d. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions.

Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions because improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.

e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.

If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS

1-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Laser product classification

Standards compliance

The product complies with both IEC standards and the Food and Drug Administration’s

Center for Devices and Radiological Health (FDA/ CDRH) regulations.

FDA/CDRH regulations

Laser products are classified in accordance with the FDA/CDRH - 21 CFR 1010 and 1040.

The classification scheme is based on the ability of the laser emission to cause injury to eye or skin during normal operating conditions.

•

In the United States, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength range (greater than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes:

Class I,

Class IIIb, or

Class IV.

Laser classification is dependent upon operating wavelength, output power and fiber modefield diameter (core diameter).

IEC requirements

The International Electro-Technical Commission (IEC) establishes standards for the electrical and electronic industries. IEC-60825 has been established for the worldwide safety of laser products.

•

According to the IEC classification, lasers and laser systems in the infrared wavelength range (greater than 700 nm) are assigned to one of the following classes:

Class 1,

Class 3A,

Class 3B, or

Class 4.

There are some major differences between the FDA/CDRH regulations and IEC:

1. The Accessible Emission Limits (AEL) are different.

2. Class 3A applies to all wavelengths.

3. Class 3B requires strict engineering controls.

4. Classification is under single fault conditions.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-9

Safety

Laser classes

The maximum output power of laser radiation depends on the type of laser diode used.

The international standards IEC-60825 or DIN/EN 60825 define the maximum output power of laser radiation for each laser class in accordance with the wavelength.

Table 1-1 Laser classes

Laser class

Wavelength

1310 nm

1550 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

1310 nm

1550 nm

Maximum output power of laser radiation

8.85 mW

10 mW

24 mW

50 mW

0.5 W

Hazard level assignment

Hazard level refers to the potential hazard from laser emission at any location in an endto-end optical fiber communication system that may be accessible during service or in the event of a failure. The assignment of hazard level uses the AELs for the classes.

•

Hazard levels for optical transmission equipment are assigned in either of the following two ways:

Actual output power from the connector or fiber cut.

If automatic power reduction is used, output power at the connector or fiber cut at one second after automatic power reduction takes place provided that maximum output and restart conditions are met.

Classification of optical telecommunication equipment

Optical telecommunication equipment is generally classified as IEC Class 1 or

FDA/CDRH Class I, because under normal operating conditions, the transmitter ports terminate on optical fiber connectors. These are covered by a front panel to ensure protection against emissions from any energized, unterminated transmitter. The circuit packs themselves, however, may be IEC Class 1 or 3A or FDA/CDRH Class I or IIIb.

1-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend optical specifications

Overview

Table 1-2 provides the optical specifications for Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend internal

laser circuit packs; these packs do not use PTMs.

Laser Circuit Pack

Code

LNW31 OC-48

LNW38 OC-12

LNW40 OC-3

LNW51 OC-12

LNW52 OC-48

LNW140 OC-

3/16DS1

LNW380 OC-12

LNW601 OC-3

Table 1-2 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend optical circuit pack laser safety specifications

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min Rcv

Pwr (dBm)

1310 0.0

0.0/-18.0

1310

-8.0

+2.0

+3.0

-8.0

-8.0/-28.0

-7.0/-30.5

-9.0/-27.0

-8.0/-28.0

Fiber

Type (µm)

SM (9)

Conn

Type

1550

1310

+2.0

0.0

-8.0/-29.0

0.0/-34.0

SM (9)

FDA Class/

IEC Class

I(LN50)/1

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-11

Safety

Table 1-3

shows the pluggable transmission module (PTM) laser safety specifications and the supported circuit packs. The following Class 1 SFP/XFP transceivers are Alcatel-

Lucent approved.

Table 1-3 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend optical PTM laser safety specifications

Module

Code

100BASE-

ZX-I1

100BASE-

LX-I1

100BASE-

FX-I1

1000BASE-

ZX-I1

BASE-TC1electrical

ESCON-

MM-I1

GE-

1X2XFC-

LX-I1

GE-

1X2XFC-

SX-I1

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

LNW87

LNW170

LNW63

LNW64

LNW74

LNW87

LNW170

LNW74

LNW87

LNW170

LNW63

LNW64

LNW87

LNW170

Wavelength

(nm)

1550

1310

1550

LNW63

LNW64

LNW87

LNW170

LNW73/73C 1310

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

+2.0

-8.0

-14.0

+5.0

-14.0

-3.0

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

-8.0/-31.0

-8.0/-25.0

Fiber

Type

(µm)

SM (9)

-14.0/-29.0

MM (50 and 62.5)

0.0/-22.5

SM (9)

-14.4/-29.0

MM (50 and 62.5)

-3.0/-19.0

SM (9) LNW63

LNW64

LNW73/73C

LNW87

LNW170

LNW705

LNW63

LNW64

LNW73/73C

LNW87

LNW170

LNW705

1310

850 -2.5

0.0/-17.0

MM (50 and 62.5)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

I(LN50)/1

RJ45 NA

I(LN50)/1

1-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

OC3SR1-I1

(S155I2)

LNW37

LNW45

LNW55

LNW84

LNW302

LNW705

1310 -8.0

-8.0/-23.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

OC3IR1-I1 LNW37

LNW45

LNW55

LNW84

LNW302

LNW705

1310 -8.0

-15.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

OC3LR1-I1 LNW37

LNW45

LNW55

LNW84

LNW302

LNW705

OC3X12X48

IR1-I1

LNW55

LNW84

1310 -0.0

0.0

-10.0/-34.0

SM (9)

-10.0/-18.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

OC3X12X48

LR1-I1

LNW55

LNW84

1310

(OC-3)

1310

(OC-12/48)

1310

(OC-3)

1310

(OC-12/48)

1310

0.0

+3.0

-8.0

0.0/-18.0

-15.0/-2.0

-9.0/-2.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

I(LN50)/1 OC12IR1-I1 LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW382

LNW705

OC12LR1-I1 LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW382

LNW705

1310 +2.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-13

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

1550 +2.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1 OC12LR2-I1 LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW382

LNW705

S622C47EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

S622C49EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

1471

1491

+5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

S622C51EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

S622C53EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

1511

1531

+5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

S622C55EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

1551 +5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

1-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

S622C57EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

1571 +5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

1591 +5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1 S622C59EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

S622C61EL LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

LNW55

LNW84

LNW705

1611 +5.0

-8.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

OC48SR1-I1 LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW705

OC48LR1-I1 LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW705

1310

-3.0

+3.0

-3.0/-18.0

-9.0/-27.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

+3.0

OC48LR2-I1 LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW705

1550 -9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-15

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

S2D23C6 1558.983

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D25C6

S2D27C6

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1557.363

1555.747

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

S2D31C6 1552.524

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D33C6

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1550.918

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D35C6

S2D37C6

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1549.315

1547.715

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

1-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

S2D45C6 1541.349

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D47C6

S2D49C6

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1539.766

1538.186

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

S2D53C6 1535.036

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D55C6

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1533.465

+4.0

-9.0/-28.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2D59C6 LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

S2G7C47LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1530.334

1471

+4.0

+5.0

-9.0/-28.0

-8.0/NA

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-17

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

1491 +5.0

-8.0/NA SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1 S2G7C49LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

S2G7C51LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

S2G7C53LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1511

1531

+5.0

-8.0/NA

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

1551 +5.0

-8.0/NA SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1 S2G7C55LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

S2G7C57LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

1571 +5.0

-8.0/NA SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

S2G7C59LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

S2G7C61LI LNW41

LNW55

LNW62

LNW84

LNW402

OC192IR2-

LNW141

LNW705

1591

1611

1550

+5.0

+2.0

-8.0/NA

-7.0/-24.0

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

1-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

X10G21C5 LNW141 1560.606

+3.0

8.0/

Table 1

-4

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G22C5 LNW141 1559.794

+3.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G23C5 LNW141 1558.983

+3.0

8.0/

8.0/

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G24C5 LNW141 1558.173

+3.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G25C5

X10G26C5

X10G27C5

X10G28C5

X10G31C5

LNW141

LNW705

1557.363

1556.555

1555.747

1554.940

1552.524

+3.0

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

X10G33C5

X10G35C5

X10G37C5

LNW141

LNW705

LNW141

LNW705

LNW141

LNW705

1550.918

1549.315

1547.715

+3.0

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-19

Safety

Module

Code

Supported

Circuit

Pack(s)

Wavelength

(nm)

Maximum

Out Pwr

(dBm)

Max/Min

Rcv Pwr

(dBm)

Fiber

Type

(µm)

Conn

Type

FDA

Class/

IEC Class

X10G45C5 LNW141

LNW705

1541.349

+3.0

8.0/

Table 1

-4

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G47C5 LNW141

LNW705

1539.766

+3.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G49C5 LNW141

LNW705

1538.186

+3.0

8.0/

8.0/

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G52C5 LNW141 1535.822

+3.0

SM (9) LC I(LN50)/1

X10G53C5

X10G54C5

X10G55C5

X10G56C5

X10G57C5

X10G58C5

X10G59C5

LNW141

1535.036

1534.250

1533.465

1532.681

1531.898

1531.116

1530.334

+3.0

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

8.0/

SM (9)

I(LN50)/1

1-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Safety

Table 1-4 Dispersion-limited receiver sensitivity for OC-192 DWDM PTMs

Data Rate

9.9 Gb/s

10.7-11.1 Gb/s with

Forward Error

Correction (FEC) enabled

Receiver

Sensitivity

0 ps/nm dispersion

-24.0 dBm

-27.0 dBm

Receiver

Sensitivity

1300 ps/nm dispersion

-22.0 dBm

Receiver

Sensitivity

1600 ps/nm dispersion

-25.0 dBm

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-21

Safety

1-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Part I: Physical and power installation

Overview

Introduction

Part I covers the physical mounting of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf using the Horizontal Bay Mount. This section includes running and connecting power cables, interconnecting cables, alarm cables, and as required, external timing, and communication cables. Initial circuit pack installation

(not seated) is also included.

Part I provides a recommended checklist Table I-2 “Installation checklist” to follow when

installing Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend. Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why. This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Note:

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf does not require the installation of an additional fan shelf since the fan unit is integral to the shelf itself.

Contents

This part includes the following chapters:

Chapter 2, “Physical installation”

Chapter 3, “Cable and fiber installation”

Chapter 4, “Circuit pack installation”

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

I-1

Physical and power installation

Tools, test equipment and accessories

This section lists the tools, test equipment and accessories needed to perform all the procedures in this installation manual.

Listed below are the required tools, test equipment and accessories.

Qty.

Description

19" Mounting Brackets

849011804

Screwdriver(s)

Thomas & Betts

R-5648B

Crimping Tool

Paladin

†

Coaxial Wire

Stripper R-5648B

Replacement Paladin

†

Cassette R-5648B D5

Wire-Wrap Gun

R-4496A

Comments

The 19" mounting brackets (C849011804) must be ordered separately and are required to install the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend in a 19" bayframe.

A screwdriver(s) with the appropriate head(s) is (are) required for securing the mounting screws, repositioning the mounting brackets, installing the interfacing cables, and for setting the circuit breakers to the OFF position.

The crimping tool and wire stripper are only required if installing DS3/EC1 cables. The replacement cassette is for the wire stripper tool.

ESD Wrist Strap

R-4987C

Torque Wrench

R-5952

Metric & Inch Series Tool

Set

R-6001

Multimeter (Optional)

ITE-6379C

The wire-wrap gun is required for terminating DS1/E1 cable and must be able to accommodate 24 gauge wire.

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

A torque wrench (50-250 IN-LBS) is used when tightening the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

shelf to the frame. It is also used when reattaching the mounting brackets to the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Because some of our Optical Networking Products

(also know as Transport) may have some metric fasteners, please ensure that the proper metric tools are available.

The voltmeter must be capable of measuring DC voltage in the 40 to 60 volt range. The use of the voltmeter is optional since the shelf will alarm or shut down if the proper voltage is not supplied.

I-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical and power installation

Qty.

Description Comments

1 Ohmmeter

ITE-6379C

An ohmmeter is required to verify that the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend is properly grounded.

DS1/E1 Error Rate Test Set

ITE-7113

DS3/EC1 Error Rate Test

Set

ITE-7113

A DS1/E1 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS1/E1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

A DS3/EC1 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS3/EC1 cabling. A T-BERD 209 or equivalent is recommended.

1 Optical Test Set (Optional) A Optical test set is required for testing of low speed optics OC3/12/48. An Omniber 718 or equivalent is recommended.

2 or 3 LC-type Optical Fiber

Jumper ITE-7169

(108918269)

Two optical fiber jumpers with LC type connectors are required to optically loop the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf for test purposes. In addition, for shelves containing optical circuit packs in any of the function unit slots, a single optical fiber jumper is required for testing of the individual ports.

1 15-dB LC-type LBO ITE-

7196 (108279480)

Noyes OFS 300-200X

Optical Fiber Scope

ITE-7129

LBOs are only required when optically looping the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves containing optical circuit packs in any of the function unit slots; a single 15-dB LBO is required for testing of the individual ports

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the optical fiber scope may not be needed

For use with the Noyes OFS 300-200X Optical Fiber

Scope

2.5mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D1

1.25mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D2

Noyes VFS-1 ITE-7187

Video Fiber Scope

Individual presaturated alcohol wipes ITE-7136

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the video scope may not be needed

99% pure isopropyl alcohol

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

I-3

Physical and power installation

Qty.

Description Comments

1 CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette ITE-7137

Type A Reel

1 Type A Reel CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette Replacement Reel

ITE-7137 D1

Luminex Stick port cleaners ITE-7134 & ITE-

7135

1.25 mm and 2.5 mm sizes

Luminex Cloth R-6033 5.5” x 5.5”

Notes:

* Registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation

† Registered trademark of Paladin Corporation.

PC and cable requirements for WaveStar

CIT

This section lists the required equipment needed to run the WaveStar

CIT software with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Quantity

Description

Personal Computer

(PC)

RS-232 Interface

Cable

RJ45 to RJ45 Crossover Cable

Comments

See

Part I: “Physical and power installation”

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable (Comcode 848748869)

I-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical and power installation

PC minimum requirements

It is anticipated that most customers will dedicate a laptop or personal computer (PC) to run the WaveStar

CIT software. However, any properly configured computer will also suffice. The following table shows the requirements for the computer.

Note:

Windows Vista is not supported.

Table I-1

Components

Processor views)

Computer requirements

RAM (1 system view)

RAM (up to 5 system

Virtual Memory

Available Hard Disk Space

†

Minimum

Pentium 266 MHz

256 MB

512 MB

139 MB

750 MB

Recommended

Pentium IV 1 GHz

512 MB

1 GB

Video

Network Interface

CD ROM Drive

Operating System

267 MB

850 MB (for all graphical packages)

800X600 256 Colors

(8 Bit)

10/100 baseT Network Card

1024X768 16 Million

Colors (24 Bit)

Required

Microsoft Windows

2000

Microsoft Windows

Internet Browser Internet Explorer

5.0/5.5/6.0/7.0

Notes:

* Minimum requirements are sufficient to run two to three GUI System Views, unless otherwise noted. Recommended requirements are intended to be used as a general guideline to optimize WaveStar

CIT performance. As the CIT is used with multiple NE connections and multiple NE types, the processor type and speed and the memory size will all factor into

CIT performance.

† Available hard disk space required to install and store the CIT and Generic Software and online help files is approximately 750 MB. During installation, an additional 100 MB is required. To store a copy of an NE generic, another 125 MB is needed for each generic

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

I-5

Physical and power installation

Table I-2 Installation checklist

Section and chapter Procedure

Chapter 2, “Physical installation”

Inspection (p. 2-5)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend center divider

(p. 2-5)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf installation (p. 2-8)

Power cable installation (p. 2-13)

Chapter 3, “Cable and fiber installation”

Inspection (p. 3-5)

Required

Yes

DS1/E1 cable installation (p. 3-6)

Yes

DS3/EC-1 cable installation (p. 3-13)

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable installation (p. 3-30)

10/100BASE-T Ethernet cable installation (p.

3-36)

IAO LAN and TCP/IP cable installation (p. 3-

41)

Modem cable installation (p. 3-44)

Sync cable installation (p. 3-46)

Office alarm cable installation (p. 3-50)

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable installation (p. 3-54)

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main optical fiber cable installation (p. 3-58)

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 low-speed optical fiber cable installation (p. 3-61)

100/1000BASE-X optical fiber cable installation (p. 3-62)

CIT (RS-232) cable installation (p. 3-64)

Final operations (p. 3-66)

Chapter 4, “Circuit pack installation”

Yes

Completed

Yes No

I-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical and power installation

Section and chapter Procedure Required

Completed

Yes No

Powering (p. 4-2)

Yes

Initial circuit pack installation (p. 4-9)

Yes

LNW2 (SYSCTL) installation (p. 4-10)

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main OLIU installation (p. 4-10)

LNW39/LNW391 (DS1/DS3/16/3), LNW111

(3DS3) and LNW112 (16DS1) installation

(optional) (p. 4-17)

LNW7 (28DS1PM) and LNW8/LNW801

(56DS1E1) installation (optional) (p. 4-12)

LNW16 (12DS3/EC1) and LNW19B

(48DS3/EC1) installation (optional) (p. 4-13)

LNW18 (12TMUX) and LNW20

(48TMUXDS3EC1) installation (optional) (p.

4-14)

LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL)

8-port installation (optional) (p. 4-20)

LNW37 (OC-3 4 port PTM OLIU) or LNW45

(OC-3 8 port PTM OLIU) (p. 4-16)

LNW49 (OC-12 4 port PTM OLIU) low-speed installation (optional) (p. 4-18)

LNW62 (4 OC-48 PTM OLIU) or LNW55

(OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 12/4 port OLIU) low speed installation (optional) (p. 4-19)

LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL)

8-port installation (optional) (p. 4-20)

LNW73/73C (4-Fiber channel

FICON/ESCON) installation (optional) (p. 4-

21)

LNW66 (10/100T), LNW74 (10/100-PL),

LNW87 (FE/GBE PL) installation (optional)

(p. 4-22)

LNW170 (GigE/FE) (p. 4-23)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

I-7

Physical and power installation

Section and chapter Procedure Required

Completed

Yes No

LNW402 OC48 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or DWDM

PTM Optics (p. 4-24)

LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL)

8-port installation (optional) (p. 4-20)

LNW785 OMD5/8 8-channel low-loss DWDM optical mux/demux (p. 4-26)

LNW43, LNW96 (apparatus blank) installation

(optional) (p. 4-27)

LNW42, LNW95 apparatus blank installation

Notes:

1. Only required if equipped.

(optional) (p. 4-28)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend center divider

I-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2 Physical installation

Overview

Purpose

This section provides equipment installation instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf using the horizontal bay mount configuration. The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves with the removable center divider can support either half width or full width cards in the Main function slots.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

Planning

Inspection

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf installation

Power cable installation

2-1

Planning

Description

This section provides information about the following:

•

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Mounting options

Cabling checklist

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-1

Physical installation

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Listed below are the tools, test equipment and accessories necessary to perform the procedures in this section.

Quantity

Description

19" Mounting Brackets

849011804

Screwdriver(s)

Comments

The 19" mounting brackets (849011804) must be ordered separately and are required to install the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend in a 19" bayframe.

A screwdriver(s) with the appropriate head(s) is

(are) required for securing the mounting screws, repositioning the mounting brackets, installing the interfacing cables, and for setting the circuit breakers to the OFF position.

ESD Wrist Strap R-4987C A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

Multimeter (Optional)

ITE-6379

The voltmeter must be capable of measuring DC voltage in the 40 to 60 volt range. The use of the voltmeter is optional since the shelf will alarm or shut down if the proper voltage is not supplied.

Torque Wrench ITE-5952 A torque wrench (50-250 IN-LBS) is used when tightening the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf to the frame. It is also used when reattaching the mounting brackets to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Metric & Inch Series Tool

Set

R - 6001

Ohmmeter ITE-6379

Because some of our Optical Networking Products

(also know as Transport) may have some metric fasteners, please ensure that the proper metric tools are available.

An ohmmeter is required to verify that the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend is properly grounded.

Mounting options

The Horizontal Bay Mount mounting brackets on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend are designed to allow for mounting in the following:

•

Standard 23-inch wide network bay frames

The recommended network bay frames are the ED-8C500-50 and the ED-8C501-50

(rear access only).

2-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

•

Mounted in 23-inch seismic network bay frame

•

The ED-8C800-50 and ED-8C801-50 seismic network bay frames are designed for use in all earthquake zones, and in general, do not require top support at the 7-foot level.

These frames meet Pacific Bell Equipment Framework Standard PBS-000-102PT.

19-inch bay frames

23-inch wide EIA-Type bay frames

Rear cover assembly

This section describes the optional rear cover assembly kits for both Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelves, (Bay Mount Kit number 849001060) or Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelves (Shelf mount Kit number 849001367). Both kit assemblies will fit

either the 19" or 23" bracket assemblies. Figure 2-1 shows the shelf mount Kit assembly.

Note:

The shelves (Shelf mount Kit number 849001367) have four pre-drilled holes in the shelf assembly backplane. If the shelf assembly backplane have the four nondrilled holes, then the bay mount kit (Bay Mount Kit number 849001060) must be used.

Shelf mount rear cover

Figure 2-1 Shelf mount rear cover kit 849001367

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-3

Physical installation

Bay mount rear cover

Figure 2-2 Bay mount rear cover kit 849001060

Note:

The rear bay cover requires the front mounting configuration of the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. This is mounting the shelf on the front of the bay with 5 inches of the shelf protruding from the front of the bay.

Cabling checklist

This section briefly describes cabling information, including the number of particular cables required. For information regarding available cable lengths and ordering comcodes, see the tables in this chapter.

Table 2-1, “Cable requirements and options” (p. 2-4) lists available cables along with the

required number (if any).

Table 2-1 Cable requirements and options

Cable assembly description

Power

Required

Yes

See note

1. One -48VA and -48VB main power feeder is required per shelf. The shelf requires the use of a right angle power connector on each feed.

2-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Inspection

Description

Perform the following procedure before installing the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Steps

Inspect the shelf for visible damage including bent or touching backplane pins.

Note:

If any backplane pins are damaged, see Appendix D, “Backplane pin replacement” for instructions on repairing the damaged pin(s).

Each Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf comes with an installation kit. The bag containing the kit is attached inside the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. The kit contains the following items:

Quantity

Description

Thread Cutting Screws

ESD Jack stud

Caution Label

Verify that the kit is available and contains the items listed above.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Figure 2-3, “Center divider” (p. 2-6)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend center divider

Description

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves, comcode 849031372, come shipped with center dividers which can support half-width cards. The center dividers are removed for full-width cards. This section describes the procedure to remove the center dividers on a

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf if supporting full width cards.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-5

Physical installation

New installation

The procedure below describes how to remove the center dividers for new installations.

Steps

The figure below shows the new Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf with the center dividers inserted.

Note:

The center dividers come equipped with a spring clip CC849027222 not shown in

that latches the dividers together.

Remove this spring clip by inserting a finger into the hole and pulling gently away from the shelf. Keep this spring clip available if there is ever a need to reinstall the center divider for the use of half-width cards in the shelf.

Figure 2-3 Center divider

Spring clip

Center

Divider

To remove the top center divider, depress the spring clip latch located on top of the divider and slide the divider out.

Remove the bottom center divider by depressing the bottom spring clip and sliding the divider out.

Existing installation

This procedure is used to remove the center dividers if circuit packs are installed above or below the dividers and the spring clip is not accessable.

2-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Steps

The figure below shows the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf with both center dividers inserted and a working circuit pack installed above the top divider.

Figure 2-4 Center divider with circuit packs installed.

Using a small flat screwdriver, separate the padding as shown in Figure 2-4, “Center divider with circuit packs installed.” (p. 2-7) .

Insert the screwdriver approximately two thirds of the way up from the bottom of the top divider and depress the latch.

Gently slide out the center divider.

Repeat for the bottom center divider if necessary. The latch on the bottom divider moves bottom to top.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-7

Physical installation

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf installation

Description

As an example of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf installation, the following steps describe mounting the shelf from the front of a 23-inch bay frame. Mounting from the rear of a 23-inch bay frame or from the front/rear of a 19-inch bay frame is similar with the exception of the position of the side brackets.

Positioning of the side brackets is also specified.

Note:

This section requires previous bay frame installation and grounding.

Note:

If the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is to be used in an outside cabinet with no exchange of outside air, the air filter must be removed.

Steps

Position the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf on a stable work surface.

Open the front cover, remove the installation kit bag, and remove the caution label from the bag.

Apply the label to the shelf in a position where it will be visible when the shelf is mounted in the bayframe.

Note:

The recommended position is on the left side of the inside of the front cover, but the customer may position it to fit their local practices as long as it is visible when accessing the front of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Close and latch the front cover.

2-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

•

Determine the mounting configuration for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf:

Type of bay frame (23-inch or 19-inch wide)

Mounting position (front or rear)

Position in bay (bottom to top).

Note:

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is shipped with the mounting brackets positioned for mounting to the front of a 23-inch wide network bay frame with a 5 in. setback.

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf mounting brackets may have to be repositioned and remounted, depending on the frame type and mounting position (front or rear).

If necessary, reposition the shelf mounting brackets accordingly.

For 23-inch frame, front or rear mounting, see Figure 2-5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend mounting bracket positions - 23-Inch/19-Inch frame” (p. 2-10) .

Note:

The 19" mounting brackets (C849011804) must be ordered separately and are required to install the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend in a 19" bayframe.

For 19-inch frame, front or rear mounting, see Figure 2-5, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend mounting bracket positions - 23-Inch/19-Inch frame” (p. 2-10) .

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-9

Physical installation

Figure 2-5 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend mounting bracket positions - 23-Inch/19-

Inch frame

6.0 in.

Front Mount Left Side

Front

5.0 in.

Front Mount Left Side

Front

8.0 in.

Rear Mount Left Side

Determine the position that the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf will be mounted.

Note:

Start at the bottom of the bay and add shelves from bottom to top.

2-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Fiber duct

This section will describe how to install an optional fiber duct.

Note:

If a fiber duct is being used to diversify fiber, a 1-inch space is required to accommodate the duct below the existing Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend. Use the

Assembly Fiber Duct kit drawing 848949152 to attach the duct to the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend. See

Figure 2-6, “Fiber duct mounting” (p. 2-11) .

Figure 2-6 Fiber duct mounting

Position the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf in the frame and secure the shelf to the frame using the thread-forming screws included with the shelf (3 screws per side). Tighten the screws to 21 in.-lb. (minimum)/30 in.-lb. (maximum).

Note:

There is a jumper on the fan controller board, at the corner closest to the toprear of the chassis as installed. It is labeled "FILT BLK" and the two positions are

"ENABLE" and "DISABLE." The fan ships with the jumper in the disable position which prevents the filter alarm from working. To enable the filter alarm, move the jumper to the "ENABLE" position. This is the only jumper on the board. The OSP cabinet must be engineered so that the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend does not impede air flow to other equipment in the cabinet. The OSP cabinet must be engineered to provide a two inch open space on the left and right sides of the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend for air flow. Mounting frame and flanges may intrude on this space.

Note:

Be sure to mount the shelf using the thread-forming screws provided with the shelf to ensure a solid ground connection from the bay to the shelf.

Note:

For bays that use power coat paint e.g., most 19" bays, studies on that type of paint indicate that the material is not always removed cleanly using the thread forming screws and can create a poor ground, thus we recommend a secondary ground be used.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-11

Physical installation

The secondary ground would consist of a 12 AWG wire from the UL (Green M5

Screw) safety ground on the lower left side of the rear of the shelf to the bayframe

(where the bayframe has been scraped clean of paint and treated with no-ox) or directly to the office ground. See

Figure 2-7, “Safety ground screw.” (p. 2-12) .

Figure 2-7 Safety ground screw.

Mount the ESD Jack Stud on the rear of the bayframe where it will be accessible when accessing the rear of the shelf.

If fiber spools are to be used, attach the spools to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend using the Fiber Spool Bracket Kit drawing 848949152. Attach the bracket to the shelf first and then the top fiber spool to the bracket. The lower fiber spool will need to overlap the top spool to snap into place. Run the excess fiber per office practices around the spools to minimize the bend radius. See

Figure 2-8, “Fiber spools” (p. 2-13)

If Alcatel-Lucent fiber ducts are used, see Figure 2-8, “Fiber spools” (p. 2-13) . All high-

speed fibers are to be run in the duct closest to the shelf for both left and right ducts. The next two ducts away from the shelf are for low-speed fibers.

2-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Figure 2-8 Fiber spools

Verify with an ohmmeter that the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is grounded to the bay frame. Measure between the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf mounting bracket and the office ground lug on the bay frame.

Requirement: The ohmmeter reads less than 1 ohm.

Verify with an ohmmeter that the ESD Jack Stud mounted at the rear of the shelf is grounded to the bay frame. Measure between the ESD Jack Stud and the office ground lug on the bay frame.

Requirement: The ohmmeter reads less than 1 ohm.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 2-2, “Power cable assemblies” (p. 2-16) and Table 2-3, “Power connections”

Power cable installation

Description

This section provides instructions on installing the power cable and cable bracket for the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Two feeders (A and B) are required from the battery distribution fuse board (BDFB) or battery distribution circuit breaker bay (BDCBB) to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend bay.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-13

Physical installation

(p. 2-16)

lists the available power cable assemblies and power connections, respectively.

CAUTION

Verify that the BDCBB breakers are off or that the BDFB fuses are not installed.

Steps

Connect the A and B power cables to the A and B power connector housings on the back of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend Shelf. See

Figure 2-9, “Power connection”

(p. 2-14)

CAUTION

Ensure that the four parts of the terminal inside the connector attached to the power cable are properly aligned before inserting the connector into the power connector housing. Failure to do so may result in damage to the connector.

Figure 2-9 Power connection

Route the power cable out of the bay and toward the BDCBB or BDFB, stacking the cable in the bay.

Note:

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is powered by -48 V DC.

CAUTION

Verify that the BDCBB breakers are off or that the BDFB fuses are not installed.

Splice feeders from the BDCBB or BDFB to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend power cable. See

Table 2-3, “Power connections” (p. 2-16) . and should be labeled as follows;

2-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Note:

Four wires are spliced to the power cables.

1. BAT A

2. BAT A RTN

3. BAT B

4. BAT B RTN

Note:

Each feeder at the BDCBB or BDFB should be fused for 25 amperes for bay arrangements and 15 amperes for a single shelf.

Leave the BDCBB breakers off or BDFB fuses out until you are ready to perform the procedures in

Chapter 4, “Circuit pack installation”

of this manual.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-15

Physical installation

Table 2-2 Power cable assemblies

Description

Power Cable

Kits with Right

Angle

Connectors and

Two 6 Gauge cables

Cable assembly #

848929493

848929501

Cable length

(feet)

100

Jacket color

One Red and One

Blue

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Connectors on rear of the shelf (BAT A and BAT B)

Power Cable

Kits with Right

Angle

Connectors and

Two 8 Gauge cables

Power Cable

Kits with Right

Angle

Connectors and

10 Gauge cables

848929519

848929527

848929535

848929543

848929550

848929568

848841839

100

12 Has far end connectors for a power distribution panel

14 AWG 848999496 15

Table 2-3 Power connections

Alcatel-

Lucent 1665

DMXtend bkpl conn.

P10

P11

Shelf power connectors Pin #

BAT A

BAT B

Color

Cable Wire

Red R

Blue

Designation Name

-48VA BAT A

-48RTNA

-48VB

-48RTNB

BAT A RTN

BAT B

BAT B RTN

2-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Physical installation

Final operations

Description

Final check on equipment installation.

Steps

Verify that all the power cables are properly dressed/connected.

Verify that all power cables are properly labeled.

Replace rear cover on shelf if ordered.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

2-17

Physical installation

2-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3 Cable and fiber installation

Overview

Purpose

This section provides cabling instructions for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer

Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf using the horizontal bay mount configuration. The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves with the removable center divider can support either half width or full width cards in the Main function slots.

Note:

Ensure only ANGLED LC connectors appear at IN ports of optical circuit packs. The “ANGLED” is referring to the rotating boot on the connector and not the connector. APC or Angled Polished Connectors are not supported.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics

Planning

Connector references

Inspection

DS1/E1 cable installation

DS3/EC-1 cable installation

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable installation

10/100BASE-T Ethernet cable installation

IAO LAN and TCP/IP cable installation

Modem cable installation

Sync cable installation

Office alarm cable installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-1

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable installation

Table 3-1, “Cable requirements and options” (p. 3-3) lists available cables along with the

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main optical fiber cable installation

3-58

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 low-speed optical fiber cable installation

100/1000BASE-X optical fiber cable installation

CIT (RS-232) cable installation

Planning

Description

This section provides information about the following:

•

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Mounting options

Cabling checklist

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Listed below are the tools, test equipment and accessories necessary to perform the procedures in this section.

Quantity

Description

Screwdriver(s)

Comments

A screwdriver(s) with the appropriate head(s) is

(are) required for securing the mounting screws, repositioning the mounting brackets, installing the interfacing cables, and for setting the circuit breakers to the OFF position.

Thomas & Betts

R-5648B Crimping Tool

Paladin

Coaxial Wire

Stripper R-5648B D5

Replacement Paladin

Cassette R-5648B D5

1. The crimping tool, wire stripper and soldering iron are only required if installing DS3/EC-1 cables. The replacement cassette is for the wire stripper tool.

Wire-Wrap Gun R-4496A The wire-wrap gun is required for terminating

DS1/E1 cable and must be able to accommodate 24 gauge wire.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Quantity Description Comments

ESD Wrist Strap R-4987C A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

Multimeter (Optional)

ITE-6379

The voltmeter must be capable of measuring DC voltage in the 40 to 60 volt range. The use of the voltmeter is optional since the shelf will alarm or shut down if the proper voltage is not supplied.

Notes:

1 Registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation

2 Registered trademark of Paladin Corporation.

Cabling checklist

required number (if any).

Table 3-1 Cable requirements and options

Cable assembly description Required

CIT Yes

DS1/E1 Optional

DS3/EC-1 Optional

DS1/DS3 Hybrid Optional

Office Alarm

Office Alarm Mult

Optional

Miscellaneous Discrete

LAN 10BASE-T (Crossover)

Optional

LAN 10BASE-T (Straight Through) Optional

Sync Timing Optional

Modem Optional

See note

3, 4

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-3

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

1. One CIT Cable Assembly is required for PC interface with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend (not included with equipment).

2. Two DS1/E1 Cable Assembly are required for each D or G function unit group that will support additional DS1/E1 traffic using the LNW8/801. Each DS1/E1 Cable

Assembly consists of two separate cable assemblies, both containing 28 pairs of 24 gauge cable. One cable is for input and the other cable is for output.

3. One DS3/EC-1 Cable Assembly is required for each D or G function unit group that will support 12 DS3’s of traffic. Each DS3/EC-1 Cable Assembly consists of two separate cable assemblies, both containing 735A cables. One cable consists of 12 inputs and the other cable consists of 12 outputs.

4. Two DS3/EC-1 Cable Assembly are required for each D or G function unit group that will support additional DS3/EC-1 traffic using the LNW19B or LNW20. Each

DS3/EC-1 Cable Assembly consists of two separate cable assemblies, both containing

735A cables. One cable consists of 24 inputs and the other cable consists of 24 outputs.

5. One DS1/DS3 Hybrid Cable Assembly is required for A/B function unit Group to support use of the LNW39 (16DS1/3DS3), LNW84 (16DS1/3DS3), LNW111 (3DS3),

LNW112 (16DS1), LNW140 (16DS1) and LNW391 (16DS1/3DS3) Hybrid. Each

DS1/DS3 Hybrid Cable Assembly consists of two separate cable assemblies, both containing 28 pairs of 24 gauge cable a Coaxial 735A cable. One cable is for input and the other cable is for output.

6. When cabling the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend for office alarm applications, one

Office Alarm Cable Assembly is required for the bottom Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf in a bay frame. One Office Alarm Mult Cable Assembly is required for each additional Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf in the bay frame. For example, if four Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves are located in a single 7-foot bay frame, one Office Alarm Cable Assembly and three Office Alarm Mult Cable

Assemblies are required.

7. These cables are used for IAO LAN (OSI/TCP-IP)/Front LAN (OSI/TCP-IP) connection (J16 and Front LAN port). LAN 10BASE-T cross over cable should be used if the shelf is directly connected to a PC and LAN 10BASE-T straight through cable should be used if shelf is connected to a hub.

Connector references

Description

Figure 3-1 provides the pinouts of some of the connectors used to interface with the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-1 Connector types and pinouts

1 5 5 1

6 9

DB-9 male-type connector

9 6

DB-9 female-type connector

1 8

9 15

DB-15 male-type connector

1 13

8 1

15 9

DB-15 female-type connector

13 1

14 25

DB-25 male-type connector

43 62

DB-62 male-type connector

25 14

DB-25 female-type connector

21 1

62 43

DB-62 female-type connector

RJ-45 type connector

Inspection

Description

Perform the following procedure before installing the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend cables.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the shelf for visible damage including bent or touching backplane pins.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-5

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Note:

If any backplane pins are damaged, see Appendix D, “Backplane pin replacement”

for instructions on repairing the damaged pin(s).

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

“DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable installation” (p. 3-30)

DS1/E1 cable installation

Description

This section describes how to connect the DS1/E1 transmission cables for function group

D or G, to the shelf, route the cables out of the bay and connect the cables to the DSX.

Perform this procedure if DS1/E1 cables are required.

Note:

When cabling the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to a DSX, the DSX becomes an extension of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections.

Thus the IN on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the IN of the

DSX and the OUT of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the

OUT of the DSX respectively.

The cables have connectors at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf end and must be wire-wrapped at the DSX end. A total of two function groups fully cabled will have 112

DS1/E1 drop capacity.

Note:

The 112 DS1 drops do not include the 16 port DS1 drop available when using the LNW39/LNW391 DS1/DS3/16/3 combo card in slot A/B or the LNW84.

Instructions for cabling slot A/B are provided in

Note:

The connectorized cable end is grounded to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend frame ground through the backplane. Alcatel-Lucent recommends that the shield at both ends of the DS1/E1 cable be grounded. Ground at the DSX end per office requirements.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification. Obtain the DS1/E1 cables per

Table 3-2, “DS1/E1 cable assemblies” (p. 3-9) and note the function group where each cable will be used.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Label the cables, indicating bay, shelf, function group (D or G) and direction (IN or OUT of the bay) at each end.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the function group cables at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend end, carefully matching the correct connector with the appropriate backplane connectors as shown in

Figure 3-2, “DS1/E1 cable connectors” (p. 3-7) .

Note:

DS1/E1 cable retaining screws must be tightened to a maximum of 6.5 in-lb.

Do not overtighten.

Note:

The first 28 DS1/E1s of a Function Group must be connected to the right side connectors (J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G). An additional capacity of 28 DS1/E1s, 29-56, are used when the LNW8 circuit pack is used. The second 28 DS1/E1s of a Function

Group are connected to the backplane (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G).

Note:

The DS1/E1 cables that connect to the right side connectors (J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G) are different from the cables that connect to the connectors in the center of the backplane (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G). See

Table 3-2, “DS1/E1 cable assemblies”

(p. 3-9) for more information.

Figure 3-2 DS1/E1 cable connectors

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the backplane and out of the bay to the DSX.

Note:

Cables from J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G route to the right of the shelf (when

facing the rear of the shelf) and up the bay frame. See Figure 3-3, “DS1/E1 cable routing to the right” (p. 3-8) . Cables from J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G route to the left of the shelf (when facing the rear of the shelf) and up the bay frame. See Figure 3-4,

“DS1/E1 cable routing to the left” (p. 3-8) .

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-7

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Note:

When dressing the cables from the connectors in the center of the shelf be sure to allow for access to connectors to the left or right of the center connectors depending on whether cable dresses to the right or the left. See

Figure 3-4, “DS1/E1 cable routing to the left” (p. 3-8)

Figure 3-3 DS1/E1 cable routing to the right

Figure 3-4 DS1/E1 cable routing to the left

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the cable rack and into the terminating bay.

................................................................................................................................................

Remove slack and cut the DS1/E1 cables to the desired length at the DSX.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Referring to Table 3-3, “DS1 transmission connections” (p. 3-11)

codes and wire-wrap the cables at the DSX.

, carefully observe color

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-4, “DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies” (p. 3-17)

Table 3-2 DS1/E1 cable assemblies

200

250

350

450

100

125

150

175

550

655

Cable length

(feet)

Cable assembly #

848954988

848955001

848923074

848548327

848923082

848548335

848923090

848548343

848923108

848923116

848548350

848790762

848548368

848790770

848790788

Description

Function Group G

DS1/E1 In (CA1) and

DS1/E1 Out (CA2) Cable

Function Group D

DS1/E1 In (CA1) and

DS1/E1 Out (CA2) Cable

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

These cables route to the

left (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J2D (IN),

J4D (OUT) and J8G

(IN), J10G (OUT)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-9

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

250

350

450

550

125

150

175

200

100

Cable length

(feet)

Cable assembly #

848954962

848954970

848934964

848912473

848934972

848912564

848934980

848912648

848934998

848935003

848912671

848912978

848912986

848913000

Description

Function Group G

DS1/E1 In (CA1) and

DS1/E1 Out (CA2) Cable

Function Group D

DS1/E1 In (CA1) and

DS1/E1 Out (CA2) Cable

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

These cables route to the

right (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J1D (IN),

J3D (OUT) and J7G

(IN), J9G (OUT)

655 848935011

Notes:

1. Each Cable Assembly # is a kit that contains 2 cables. For Input connections use cable

CA1 (DS1/E1 IN) and for Output connections use cable CA2 (DS1/E1 OUT).

2. Each Cable Assembly # that routes to the right (when facing the rear of the shelf), listed includes all the DS1/E1 cables for one function group using the 28DS1 card.

3. In addition to each Cable Assembly # that route to the right (when facing the rear of the shelf), one Cable Assembly # of cables that route to the left (when facing the rear of the shelf), must be ordered for the additional capacity of the 56DS1/E1 card.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

connectors J1D through J4D and J7G through J10G can be used for either DS1/E1 or DS3/EC-1 cabling.

5. Cables are terminated in J1D through J4D and J7G through J10G connectors at the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend end and unterminated at the other end for wire-wrap installation.

6. The cable connectors are 62 pins D-Sub male-type connectors and fit into J1D through

J4D and J7G through J10G.

7. The DS1/E1 cables are 24 Gauge.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-3 DS1 transmission connections

4 1 (13)

2 (14)

3 (15)

4 (16)

5 1 (17)

2 (18)

3 (19)

4 (20)

6 1 (21)

2 (22)

3 (23)

4 (24)

DSX-1 connections

G r o u p

ChanD

T/R term

1 1 (1)

2 (2)

3 (3)

4 (4)

2 1 (5)

2 (6)

3 (7)

4 (8)

3 1 (9)

2 (10)

3 (11)

4 (12)

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

R/BR

R/S

BK/BL

BK/O

BK/G

BK/BR

BK/S

Y/BL

Y/O

Y/G

Y/BR

Y/S

V/BL

V/O

V/G

V/BR

T/R color

W/BL¹

W/O¹

W/G¹

W/BR

W/S

R/BL

R/O

R/G

50/49

8/29

7/28

6/27

48/47

5/26

46/45

4/25

56/55

13/34

54/53

12/33

11/32

10/31

52/51

9/30

19/40

18/39

60/59

17/38

58/57

16/37

15/36

14/35

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections

62-Pin conn.

pin#

T/R

Function group D conn.

In Out

Function group G conn.

In Out

J1D

J3D

Out

J7G

J9G

Out

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-11

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

DSX-1 connections

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections o u

G r p

ChanD

T/R term

T/R color

62-Pin conn.

pin#

T/R

Function group D conn.

Function group G conn.

Out In Out

7 1 (25) B8/B7 V/S 3/24

11/32

10/31

52/51

9/30

50/49

8/29

7/28

6/27

48/47

5/26

46/45

4/25

58/57

16/37

15/36

14/35

56/55

13/34

54/53

12/33

2/23

44/43

1/22

19/40

18/39

60/59

17/38

BK/G

BK/BR

BK/S

Y/BL

Y/O

Y/G

Y/BR

Y/S

V/BL

V/O

V/G

V/BR

W/S

R/BL

R/O

R/G

R/BR

R/S

BK/BL

BK/O

W/BL¹

W/O¹

W/G¹

W/BL1

W/O1

W/G1

W/BR

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

4 1 (41)

2 (42)

3 (43)

4 (44)

5 1 (45)

2 (46)

3 (47)

4 (48)

6 1 (49)

2 (50)

3 (51)

4 (52)

2 (26)

3 (27)

4 (28)

1 1 (29)

2 (30)

3 (31)

4 (32)

2 1 (33)

2 (34)

3 (35)

4 (36)

3 1 (37)

2 (38)

3 (39)

4 (40)

J2D

J4D

Out

J8G

J10G

Out

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

DSX-1 connections

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections o u

G r p

ChanD

T/R term

T/R color

62-Pin conn.

pin#

T/R

Function group D conn.

Function group G conn.

Out In Out

7 1 (53) B8/B7 V/S 3/24

2 (54)

3 (55)

B6/B5

B4/B3

W/BL¹

W/O¹

2/23

44/43

4 (56) B2/B1 W/G¹ 1/22

Notes:

1. Some wire colors are used twice. White binder cables are for Channel 1 through 25 or Channel 29 through 53 and blue binder cables are for Channels

26, 27 and 28 or Channels 54, 55 and 56 are shaded.

DS3/EC-1 cable installation

Description

This section describes how to connect the DS3/EC-1 cables to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf and route the cables out of the bay and to the DS3/EC-1 terminating equipment.This procedure covers both the 12 cable and the 24 cable DS3/EC1 cables.

Perform this procedure if DS3/EC-1 cables are required.

Note:

When cabling the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to a DSX, the DSX becomes an extension of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections.

Therefore, the IN on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the IN of the DSX and the OUT of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the OUT of the DSX respectively

DS3/EC-1 cable options are listed in

DS3/EC-1 transmission connections are in Table 3-5, “Twenty-four cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections” (p. 3-24)

and Table 3-6, “Twelve cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections” (p. 3-28)

. Total of two function groups fully cabled will have 96 DS3 drop capacity.

Note:

The 96 DS3 figure does not include the 3 DS3 drops available when using the

LNW39/LNW391 16/DS1/3/DS3 combo card in slot A/B. Instructions for cabling slot

A/B are provided in “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable installation” (p. 3-30)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-13

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification. Obtain the DS3/EC-1 cables per

Table 3-4,

“DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies” (p. 3-17) and note the function group where each cable will

be used. Label the cables, indicating bay, shelf, function group (D or G) and direction (IN or OUT of the bay) at each end.

Note:

The first 12/24 ports of a function unit must be cabled to the right side connectors (J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G), the additional DS3/EC-1 capacity ports (25 -

48) are cabled to the center connectors of the shelf (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G).

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the function group cables at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend end, carefully matching the correct connector with the appropriate backplane connectors as shown in

Figure 3-5, “DS3/EC-1 cable connections” (p. 3-15) .

Function group

Associated connector (DS3/EC-1)

G IN (J7G and J8G) G OUT (J9G and J10G)

D IN (J1D and J2D) D OUT (J3D and J4D)

Note:

DS3/EC-1 and TMUX cable retaining screws must be tightened to a maximum of 6.5 in-lb. Do not overtighten.

Note:

The 12 conductor DS3/EC-1 cables that support the LNW16 12DS3/EC-1 pack connect only to the right side connectors (J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G). The connectors in the center of the backplane (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G) are not used with the LNW16. See

Table 3-4, “DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies” (p. 3-17)

for more information.

Note:

The first 12/24 DS3/EC-1s of a Function Group must be connected to the right

side connectors (J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G). See Figure 3-6, “DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the right” (p. 3-15)

. The additional capacity of 24 DS3/EC-1s of the Function Group use the connectors located to the center of the backplane (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G).

Note:

The 24 conductor DS3/EC-1 cables that connect to the right side connectors

(J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G) are different from the 24 cable DS3/EC-1 cables that connect to the connectors in the center of the backplane (J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G).

See

Table 3-4, “DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies” (p. 3-17) for more information.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-5 DS3/EC-1 cable connections

Ports

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the backplane and out of the bay to the DSX per

Figure 3-6,

“DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the right” (p. 3-15) .

Figure 3-6 DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the right

Notes: The 12-conductor DS3/EC-1 cable is showing that this cable could be either the 12- or 24-conductor DS3/EC-1 cable.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-15

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-7 DS3/EC-1 cable routing to the left

Notes: The 12-conductor DS3/EC-1 cable is shown.

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the cable rack and into the terminating bay (DSX or other terminating transmission equipment).

................................................................................................................................................

Cut the cables to desired length and install the BNC connectors shipped with the cable assemblies.

Note:

When installing BNC connectors, follow the manufacturer’s instruction carefully to ensure a proper connection. Failure to do so may result in faulty DS3/EC-

1 signals as a result of improperly installed BNC connectors.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the cables to their respective positions on the terminating equipment.See

Table 3-5, “Twenty-four cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections” (p. 3-24) or

Table 3-6, “Twelve cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections” (p. 3-28) for DS3/EC-1

connections.

Note:

The 12-port cable and the 24-port cable use different signal grounds based on the circuit pack not the backplane. There is no issue interchanging these cables on the backplane. The DS3/EC-1 Signals are common between both cables.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

DS1 and DS3 Hybrid cable options are listed in Table 3-7, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable assemblies” (p. 3-33)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-4 DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies

Description

Function group D and G

12 Cable DS3/

EC-1 In (CA1) and

12 Cable DS3/EC-1

Out (CA2) Cable

Cable assembly #

849040787

849040795

849040803

849040811

849040829

849040837

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

849040845

849040852

849040860

849040878 Ne to Ne Only

849041751

849041769

849041777

The following kits include 12 individually bagged BNCs with instructions plus one spare:

KINGS 75ohm 735A cable type (12)BNC

Plug Kit

848965778

848965786

100

150

250

450

KINGS 75ohm 734D cable type (12)BNC

Plug Kit

TROMPETER

75ohm 735A cable type (12)BNC Plug

Kit

TROMPETER

75ohm 734D cable type (12)BNC Plug

Kit

848965794

848965802

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-17

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Right side cables for function group D and G

24 Cable DS3/EC-1

In (CA1) and 24

Cable DS3/EC-1 Out

(CA2) Cable

848940011

848940029

848940037

848940045

848940052

These cables route to the

right (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J1D (IN), J3D

(OUT) and J7G (IN), J9G

(OUT)

848940060

848940078

848940086

848940094

848940102

848940110

848940128

848940136

848940144

848940151

100

110

120

140

150

160

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Right side cables for function group D and G

24 Cable DS3/EC-1

In (CA1) and 24

Cable DS3/EC-1 Out

(CA2) Cable

848940169

848940177

848940185

848940193

848940201

180

200

250

300

400

Ne to Ne Only

Right side cables for function group D and G

similar to above except no BNC’s are shipped loose.

See below for different vendors’

BNC Plug Kits.

425

450

750

900

325

350

375

400

450

250

300

100

848940219

848939856

848939864

848939872

848939880

848939898

848939906

848939914

848939922

848939930

848939948

848939955

849041108

849041116

849041124

849041132

849041140

849041157

849041165

849041173

849041181

849041199

Ne to Ne Only

735A/734 Splice

735A/734 Splice NE to NE

These cables route to the

right (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J1D (IN), J3D

(OUT) and J7G (IN), J9G

(OUT)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-19

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Right side cables for function group D and G

BNC’s are shipped loose.

See below for different vendors’

BNC Plug Kits.

849041207 110 These cables route to the

right (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J1D (IN), J3D

(OUT) and J7G (IN), J9G

(OUT)

849041215

849041223

849041231

849041249

849041256

849041264

849041272

849041280

849041298

849041306

849041892

849041900

849041926

849041934

849041942

849041959

120

140

150

160

180

200

250

300

400

450

Ne to Ne Only

849041967

849041975

849041983

849041991 750 735A/734 Splice NE to NE

849042007 900 735A/734 Splice NE to NE

These kits include 25/50 individually bagged BNCs w/ assembly instructions

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

KINGS 75ohm 735A cable type (24)BNC

Plug Kit

848963062

848963070 KINGS 75ohm 734D cable type (24)BNC

Plug Kit

TROMPETER

75ohm 735A cable type (24)BNC Plug

Kit

TROMPETER

75ohm 734D cable type (24)BNC Plug

Kit

ITT CANON 75ohm

735A cable type

(24)BNC Plug Kit

ITT CANON 75ohm

734D cable type

(24)BNC Plug Kit

ITT CANON 75ohm

735A cable type

(50)BNC Plug Kit

ITT CANON 75ohm

734D cable type

(50)BNC Plug Kit

848963088

848963096

409013554

409013588

409013562

409013570

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-21

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Left side cables for function group D and G

DS3 (24PK) Cable

Assembly

849041788

849041793

849041801

250

275

300

735/734 Splice

849041819

849041827

325

350

735/734 Splice

849041835

849041843

849041850

849041868

375

400

425

450

735/734 Splice

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

Left side cables for function group D and G

Similar to above except no BNC’s are shipped loose.

See above for different vendors’

BNC Plug Kits

849040886

849040894

849040902

849040910

849040928

849040936

849040944

These cables route to the

left (as viewed from the rear of the shelf) and should be used with connectors J2D (IN), J4D

(OUT) and J8G (IN), J10G

(OUT)

849040951

849040969

849040977

849040985

849040993

849041009

849041017

849041025

849041033

849041041

849041066

849041074

849041082

849041090

848932083

180

200

250

300

400

450

120

140

150

160

100

110

Ne to Ne Only

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-23

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

848932018

Left side cables for function group D and G

Similar to above except no BNC’s are shipped loose.

See above for different vendors’

BNC Plug Kits

848932026

848932034

848932042

848932059

848932067

848932075

848839528

Notes:

1. All the DS3/EC-1 cable assemblies can be used for either function group D or G.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend connectors J1D through J4D and J7G through

J10G can be used for either DS1/E1 or DS3/EC-1 cabling.

3. Each Cable assembly # listed above contains two cable assemblies therefore a quantity of two per function group in the case of the 24 pair cables, must be ordered for the additional capacity.

4. For Input connections use cable CA1 (DS3/EC-1 IN) and for Output connections use cable CA2 (DS3/EC-1 OUT).

5. 735A cable is used to connect Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to DSX-3 or another NE (10 to 450 ft. length).

6. The cable connectors are 62 pins D-Sub male-type connectors and fit into J1D through J4D and J7G through J10G.

Table 3-5 Twenty-four cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections

Coaxial cable

Lead designation Name

Connectors

J1D (IN), J3D (OUT) and J7G (IN), J9G (OUT)

This cable routes to the right.

Connector pin#

(Ports 1 - 24)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-24

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Coaxial cable

Lead designation Name

Connector pin#

1 DS3 1R/1T Signal 40

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG9

DS3 10R/10T

FRG10

DS3 11R/11T

FRG11

DS3 12R/12T

FRG12

DS3 13R/12T

FRG13

DS3 14R/12T

FRG14

FRG1

DS3 2R/2T

FRG2

DS3 3R/3T

FRG3

DS3 4R/4T

FRG4

DS3 5R/5T

FRG5

DS3 6R/6T

FRG6

DS3 7R/7T

FRG7

DS3 8R/8T

FRG8

DS3 9R/9T

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-25

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Coaxial cable

Lead designation Name

Connector pin#

15 DS3 15R/12T Signal 36

FRG15

DS3 16R/12T

FRG16

DS3 17R/12T

FRG17

DS3 18R/12T

FRG18

DS3 19R/12T

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG19

DS3 20R/12T

FRG20

DS3 21R/12T

FRG21

DS3 22R/12T

FRG22

DS3 23R/12T

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal 23

FRG23

DS3 24R/12T

Ground

Signal

FRG24 Ground

Connectors

J2D (IN), J4D (OUT) and J8G (IN), J10G (OUT)

This Cable Routes to the Left.

25 DS3 25R/12T Signal

FRG25

DS3 26R/12T

FRG26

DS3 27R/12T

FRG27

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

(Ports 25 - 48)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-26

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Coaxial cable

Lead designation Name

Connector pin#

28 DS3 28R/12T Signal 13

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG36

DS3 37R/12T

FRG37

DS3 38R/12T

FRG38

DS3 39R/12T

FRG39

DS3 40R/12T

FRG40

DS3 41R/12T

FRG41

FRG28

DS3 29R/12T

FRG29

DS3 30R/12T

FRG30

DS3 31R/12T

FRG31

DS3 32R/12T

FRG32

DS3 33R/12T

FRG33

DS3 34R/12T

FRG34

DS3 35R/12T

FRG35

DS3 36R/12T

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-27

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Coaxial cable

Lead designation Name

Connector pin#

42 DS3 42R/12T Signal 32

FRG42

DS3 43R/12T

FRG43

DS3 44R/12T

FRG44

DS3 45R/12T

FRG45

DS3 46R/12T

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG46

DS3 47R/12T

Ground

Signal

FRG47

DS3 48R/12T

Ground

Signal

FRG48 Ground 44

Notes:

1. Lead designation for EC1 connection for cable# x should be read as

EC1 xR/xT instead of DS3 xR/xT, where x is a number from 1 to 48.

Table 3-6 Twelve cable DS3/EC-1 transmission connections

Coaxial cable

Lead designation

DS3 1R/1T

FRG1

DS3 2R/2T

FRG2

DS3 3R/3T

FRG3

Name

Connectors

J1D (IN), J3D (OUT) and J7G (IN), J9G (OUT)

This Cable Routes to the Right.

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Connector pin#

(Ports 1 - 12)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Coaxial cable Lead designation Name Connector pin#

4 DS3 4R/4T Signal 13

FRG4

DS3 5R/5T

FRG5

DS3 6R/6T

FRG6

DS3 7R/7T

FRG8

DS3 8R/8T

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG8

DS3 9R/9T

FRG9

DS3 10R/10T

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

FRG10

DS3 11R/11T

Ground

Signal

FRG11

DS3 12R/12T

Ground

Signal

FRG12 Ground 2

Note:

Lead designation for EC-1 connection for cable# x should be read as EC1 xR/xT instead of DS3 xR/xT, where x is a number from 1 to 12.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-29

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable installation

Description

This section describes how to connect the DS1 and DS3 Hybrid cables to the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf and route the cables out of the bay and to the DS1 and DS3

Hybrid Cable terminating equipment. Perform this procedure if DS1 and DS3 Hybrid cables are required.

Note:

When cabling the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to a DSX, the DSX becomes an extension of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connections.

Therefore, the IN on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the IN of the DSX and the OUT of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane connects to the OUT of the DSX respectively

DS1 and DS3 Hybrid Cable transmission connections are in Table 3-9, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS1 transmission connections” (p. 3-35)

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification. Obtain the DS1 and DS3 Hybrid cables per

Table 3-7, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable assemblies” (p. 3-33) and note the function group

where each cable will be used. Label the cables, indicating bay, shelf, function group (A and B) and direction (IN or OUT of the bay) at each end.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the function group A/B cables at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend end, carefully matching the correct connector with the appropriate backplane connectors as shown in

Figure 3-8, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable connections” (p. 3-31) .

Note:

The DS1 and DS3 cable retaining screws must be tightened to a maximum of

6.5 in-lb. Do not overtighten.

Note:

The DS1 and DS3 Hybrid Cable only supports slots A1/B1 and A2/B2 and only connects to J5A/B (IN) and J6A/B (OUT).

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-30

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-8 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable connections

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the backplane and out of the bay to the DSX per

Figure 3-9, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable routing” (p. 3-31)

Figure 3-9 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable routing

................................................................................................................................................

Route the DS1 cables along the cable rack and into the terminating bay (DSX-1 or other terminating transmission equipment), and route the DS3 cables along the cable rack and into the terminating bay (DSX-3 or other terminating transmission equipment).

................................................................................................................................................

Cut the coaxial cables to desired length and install the BNC connectors shipped with the cable assemblies.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-31

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Note:

When installing BNC connectors, follow the manufacturer’s instruction carefully to ensure a proper connection. Failure to do so may result in faulty DS3 signals as a result of improperly installed BNC connectors.

................................................................................................................................................

Referring to Table 3-8, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS3 transmission connections”

(p. 3-35)

connect the cables to their respective positions on the terminating equipment or

DSX.

................................................................................................................................................

Remove slack and cut the DS1 cables to the desired length at the DSX.

................................................................................................................................................

Referring to Table 3-9, “DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS1 transmission connections”

(p. 3-35)

, carefully observe color codes and wire-wrap the cables at the DSX.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-10, “10/100Base-T Ethernet cable assemblies” (p. 3-38) and note the function

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-32

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-7 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable assemblies

Description

Function group A/B

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable In (CA1) and

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable Out (CA2)

BNC plugs ship loose.

See below for different vendors’ BNC plugs.

Cable assembly #

849041561

849041579

849041587

849041595

849041603

849041611

Cable length

(feet) backplane connections

10 J5A/B(IN)

100

Alcatel-

Lucent 1665

DMXtend

J6A/B(OUT)

849041629

849041637

849041645

849041652

849041660

849041678

849041686

849006903

250

350

450

125

150

175

200

Function group A/B

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable In (CA1) and

DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable Out (CA2)

Similar to above Hybrids

- no BNC plugs ship loose, except the DS3 is short and staggered for interbay use.

100

125

150

175

200

250

350

J5A/B(IN)

J6A/B(OUT)

849006911

849006929

849006937

849006952

849006960

849006978

849006986

849006994

849007000 450

The following kits include 13 individually bagged BNCs with instructions:

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-33

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-

Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

KINGS 75ohm 735A cable type (12)BNC

Plug Kit

848965778

KINGS 75ohm 734D cable type (12)BNC

Plug Kit

TROMPETER 75ohm

735A cable type

(12)BNC Plug Kit

848965786

848965794

TROMPETER 75ohm

734D cable type

(12)BNC Plug Kit

848965802

Notes:

1. All the DS1 and DS3 Hybrid (28 DS1/3DS3) cable assemblies can only be used for function group A/B.

2. Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend connectors J5A/B(IN) and J6A/B(OUT) can only be used for the DS1 and DS3 Hybrid (16 DS1/3DS3) cable assemblies.

3. Each Cable assembly# listed above contains two cable assemblies.

4. For Input connections use cable CA1 (DS1 and DS3 Hybrid IN) and for Output connections use cable CA2 (DS1 and DS3 Hybrid OUT).

5. For the Coaxial cable 735A cable is used to connect Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend to DSX-3 or another NE (50 to 350 ft. length).

6. For the Coaxial cable the 450 ft. cable (849040779) is not suitable for connection to a DSX-3.

7. For the Coaxial cable the longest distance allowed to connect Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend to another NE is 450ft. of length. The 550 and 655 ft. cables are for the DS1 cables only and the Coaxial cable must be terminated at 450 ft.

8. The DS1 cables are 24 Gauge.

9. J5A/B(IN) and J6A/B(OUT) are 62 pins DSUB male type connectors.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-34

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-8 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS3 transmission connections

Coaxial cable

Lead designation

DS3 1R/1T

FRG1

DS3 2R/2T

FRG2

DS3 3R/3T

FRG3

Name

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Signal

Ground

Connector pin#

Table 3-9 DS1 and DS3 hybrid cable DS1 transmission connections

DSX-1 connections o u

G r p

ChanD

T/R term

1 (1)

2 (2)

3 (3)

4 (4)

1 (5)

2 (6)

3 (7)

4 (8)

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

1 (9)

2 (10)

3 (11)

4 (12)

1 (13)

2 (14)

3 (15)

4 (16)

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

B8/B7

B6/B5

B4/B3

B2/B1

T/R color

W/BL¹

W/O¹

W/G¹

W/BR

W/S

R/BL

R/O

R/G

R/BR

R/S

BK/BL

BK/O

BK/G

BK/BR

BK/S

Y/BL

56/55

13/34

54/53

12/33

11/32

10/31

52/51

9/30

19/40

18/39

60/59

17/38

58/57

16/37

15/36

14/35

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

backplane connections

Function group A conn.

62 pin conn.

pin# T/R In Out

J5A/

B(IN)

J6A/

B(OU

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-35

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

10/100BASE-T Ethernet cable installation

Description

This section describes how to connect the 10/100BASE-T cables to the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf and route the cables out of the bay and to the 10/100BASE-T terminating equipment. Perform this procedure if 10/100BASE-T cables are required.

This section describes how to route the 10/100BASE-T cables from the interconnecting equipment (for example, a 110/RJ45 punch down block) to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification.Obtain the 10/100BASE-T Ethernet cables per

group where each cable will be used. Label the cables, indicating bay, shelf and function group (D or G) at each end.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the function group cables at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend end, carefully matching the correct connector with the appropriate backplane connectors as shown in

Figure 3-10, “10/100BASE-T/TX cable connections” (p. 3-37)

•

Note:

Backplane connectors are associated with function Groups as follows:

J1D, J3D

➠ Function Group D

J7G, J9G

➠ Function Group G

Note:

10/100Base-TX Ethernet cable retaining screws must be tightened to a maximum of 6.5 in-lb. Do not overtighten.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-36

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-10 10/100BASE-T/TX cable connections

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables to the left along the backplane and out of the bay to the 110/RJ45 punch down block. Route the cables in the same manner as DS3/EC1 cables. See

Figure 3-11,

“10/100BASE-T cable routing” (p. 3-37) .

Note:

These cables will connect to J1D, J3D, J7G, and J9G on the right of the shelf as viewed from the rear but they will route to the left of the shelf due to the forming of the connector.

Note:

In routing to the left side of the shelf these cables will make access to connectors J2D, J4D, J8G, and J10G difficult, but there are currently no plans to use these connectors in a 10/100BASE-T application.

Figure 3-11 10/100BASE-T cable routing

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cables along the cable rack and into the terminating bay.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-37

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Cut cable to length and punch down cable to the 110 block. See

Table 3-11, “10/100BaseT

Ethernet connections” (p. 3-39) for pin out assignments.

CAUTION

The LNW66 and LNW74 10/100 BaseT-Ethernet pack does not have lightning protection for the metallic connections. Therefore it is necessary to use a lightning protected patch panel, such as the Black Box CAT5 protected patch panel JSM110A, for intra-office applications only.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-13, “LAN 10BaseT cable assemblies” (p. 3-42)

Table 3-10 10/100Base-T Ethernet cable assemblies

Description

10/100BASE-T/TX

Ethernet cable

Cable assembly #

848819090

848778114

848923280

848778122

848923298

848778106

848923306

848778148

848923314

848923322

848923330

848923348

848923355

848778130

200

225

250

275

300

100

125

150

175

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend backplane connections

J1D, J3D, J7G, and

J9G

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-38

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-11 10/100BaseT Ethernet connections

Port# (1-24)

J1D, J7G

J3D, J9G

Wire color dsub 62M pin#

W/O 50/49

W/BL 8/29

Signal

R+/R-

T+/T-

W/BR 48/47

W/G 5/26

R/BL

W/S

7/28

6/27

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

R/G

R/O

R/S

R/BR

46/45

4/25

56/55

13/34

BK/O 11/32

BK/BL 10/31

BK/BR 54/53

BK/G 12/33

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

Y/BL

BK/S

Y/G

Y/O

Y/S

Y/BR

V/O

V/BL

52/51

9/30

19/40

18/39

58/57

16/37

60/59

17/38

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

R+/R-

T+/T-

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

24 12 V/BR 15/36 R+/R1/2

V/G 14/35 T+/T3/6

Notes:

1. 10/100BASE-T/TX ethernet cables have transmit and receive on the same cable.

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

1/2

3/6

RJ-45 pin#

1/2

3/6

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-39

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Ethernet cabling to SFP modules on circuit pack faceplates

Description

Use this section to run Category 5e cables to the SFP modules on the front of LNW63,

LNW64, or LNW170, Ethernet circuit packs.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the RJ45 plugs to the faceplate SFP modules and run the cables out of the shelf as shown.

Table 3-12 GbE ethernet cables

Description

GbE ethernet cables

CAT5e Gigabit ethernet shielded connectorized on both ends with straight

RJ45 connector.

Cable assembly #

849010483

849010491

849010509

849010525

849010558

849010608

849010657

849010681

849010731

Cable length (feet)

100

150

200

300

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-40

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

IAO LAN and TCP/IP cable installation

Description

This section describes how to connect the IAO LAN/TCP-IP (LAN 10BASE-T) cable to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf and to the interfacing equipment. Perform this procedure if this cabling is required.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend supports an IntraOffice LAN (IAO LAN) interface for operations data communications to support operations systems such as the Navis

Optical

EMS (formerly WaveStar

SNMS).

Since the IAO LAN can be provisioned as an extension of the SONET DCC, the IAO

LAN can also be used to join multiple, otherwise separate subnetworks.

All NE-to-NE OI features that are supported over the DCC are also supported over the

IAO LAN.

•

The IAO LAN/TCP-IP interface cable is available in two configurations (cross-over and straight-through) and may be connected to either the front or rear of the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf. The following tables provide additional information:

Table 3-15, “LAN 10Base-T straight-through cable connections” (p. 3-44)

Table 3-14, “LAN 10Base-T cross-over cable connections” (p. 3-44)

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

If connecting directly to a PC, use a LAN 10BASE-T Cross-over Cable Assembly [see

Table 3-13, “LAN 10BaseT cable assemblies” (p. 3-42) ].

If connecting to a hub, use a LAN 10BASE-T Straight-through Cable Assembly [see

Table 3-14, “LAN 10Base-T cross-over cable connections” (p. 3-44) ].

................................................................................................................................................

If connecting to the front of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, connect the cable to the LAN (RJ45) jack on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

If connecting to the rear of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, connect the cable to the J17 port (IAO LAN) on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane and route to the

left side of the shelf. See Figure 3-12, “IAO LAN/TCP-IP cable connection to rear of

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend” (p. 3-42)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-41

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-12 IAO LAN/TCP-IP cable connection to rear of Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend

................................................................................................................................................

If a cross-over cable is used, route the cable to the desired PC LAN port.

If a straight-through cable is used, route the cable to the desired hub port location.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Obtain the modem cable per Table 3-16, “Modem cable assemblies” (p. 3-45) . Connect

Table 3-13 LAN 10BaseT cable assemblies

Description

LAN 10BASE-T

Cross-over cable to

PC / CIT

Cable assembly #

109321810

848605028

848605036

848605051

848605069

848605077

100

150

200

300

Cable length (feet)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend connections

Front Rear

SYSCTL

LAN jack

J17 (IAO LAN)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-42

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend connections

Description

Cable assembly #

Cable length (feet) Front Rear

LAN 10BASE-T

Straight-through cable to Ethernet hub

/ router

109321836

109321844

109321851

SYSCTL

LAN jack

J17 (IAO LAN)

180

200

220

240

130

140

150

160

100

110

120

260

280

300

848604948

109321869

109321877

109321885

109321893

848604955

109321901

109321919

109321927

109321935

848604963

109321943

109321950

848604971

109321968

109321976

109321984

109321992

848604997

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-43

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-14 LAN 10Base-T cross-over cable connections

Connection

J17 (IAO LAN) 1

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend bkpl Color

BL - W

W - BL

Other side

O - W

W - O

Table 3-15 LAN 10Base-T straight-through cable connections

Connection

J17 (IAO LAN) 1

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend bkpl Color

BL - W

W - BL

Other side

O - W

W - O

Modem cable installation

Description

The use of a modem will allow the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to be accessed remotely via dial up.

Note:

Perform this procedure for the shelf which will be directly connected to a modem or a distribution frame (if specified in the order).

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

the RJ45 end of the modem cable to the MODEM port (J18) of Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf and route it to the left side of the shelf. (See

Figure 3-13, “Modem cable connection” (p. 3-45) .

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-44

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-13 Modem cable connection

................................................................................................................................................

Route the modem cable out of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend bay to the modem or distribution frame.

................................................................................................................................................

Dress and tie the modem cable to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane per

Figure 3-13, “Modem cable connection” (p. 3-45) .

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the modem cable to the modem or distribution frame.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-18, “Synchronization cable assemblies (SYNC1 and SYNC2)” (p. 3-49)

Table 3-16 Modem cable assemblies

Description

Modem cable

Cable assembly #

848756508

848756524

848756516

848756532

Cable length

(feet)

100

150

250

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend connections

J18 (MODEM)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-45

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-17 Modem cable connections

Connection

Modem cable (J18)

RJ45 connector pin# Color

W - O

W - BL

O / Shield

DB25 connector pin#

Sync cable installation

Description

The section provides the instructions for installing the two types of synchronization (Sync) cables to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

A Sync cable is required if the shelf is to be externally timed. The Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend can provide DS1 external timing to a BITS clock. When the shelf is externally timed by a DS1 Reference and/or is configured to provide a Sync Output, a Sync Input timing cable is required.

This procedure should be performed on each Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf requiring an external timing source. There are two types of cables available:

1. Sync cable with a molded D-Sub 9-Pin (DB-9) connector

2. Sync cable with a wire-wrap DB-9 connector.

See

for ordering information.

Note:

Each of the Sync connections on the backplane may provide an input (gray) and output (red) termination for timing. See

Table 3-19, “Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50)

for the pinouts.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-46

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Sync cable with molded DB-9 connector procedure

Perform the following steps when using a Sync cable with a molded DB-9 connector.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the DB-9 connector end of the Sync cable to the SYNC1 (J11) port on the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane. See

Figure 3-14, “Sync cable connections”

(p. 3-47) .

Figure 3-14 Sync cable connections

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cable to proper location and cut to desire length.

................................................................................................................................................

Terminate the wires in the red jacket for an output signal. See

Table 3-19,

“Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50)

for connection information.

................................................................................................................................................

Terminate the wires in the gray jacket for an input signal. See

Table 3-19,

“Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50)

for connection information.

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4

to connect the Sync cable to the SYNC2 (J12) port.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Figure 3-14, “Sync cable connections” (p. 3-47)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-47

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Sync cable with wire-wrap DB-9 connector procedure

Perform the following steps when using the Sync cable with the wire-wrap DB-9 connector.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the wire-wrap DB-9 connector to SYNC1 (J11). See

................................................................................................................................................

Wire-wrap Rx1 and Tx1 (red cable) on the D-Sub connector for an output signal per

Table 3-19, “Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50) .

................................................................................................................................................

Wire-wrap Rx2 and Tx2 (gray cable) on the D-Sub connector for an input signal per

Table 3-19, “Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50)

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cable to proper location and cut to desire length.

................................................................................................................................................

Terminate the other end to a clock source or equipment. See Table 3-19, “Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections” (p. 3-50)

for connection information.

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 1 through Step 5 for SYNC2 (J12) connection.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-20, “Office alarm cable assemblies”

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-48

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-18 Synchronization cable assemblies (SYNC1 and SYNC2)

Description

Cable assembly #

848839619

Cable length

(feet)

175

200

225

250

100

125

150

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend backplane connections

J11 (Sync1)/

J12 (Sync2)

Sync1 (J11) and Sync2 (J12) cables, straight connector,

DS1 timing reference for DS1 external Sync In/Out timing

2 cables per code.

848923363

848839627

848923371

848839635

848923389

848923439

848923447

848839643

848923454

848923462

275

300

848839650 450

848929311 50 Customer specific Sync1 (J11) and Sync2 (J12)

Sync input signal only, with filter connectors, 2 cables per code, with wire-wrap terminals and covers, as required by the customer.

848929329 100

848929337 150

848929345

848929352

250

450 J11 (Sync1)/

J12 (Sync2)

Customer specific Sync1 (J11) and Sync2 (J12) cable harness, with filter connectors,

Two cables taped together as one harness per code, with wire wrap terminals and covers, as required by the customer.

848631255

848631271

848631289

848631297

100

150

250

848631305 450

Note:

The Sync cable is 22 gauge. Ground the Filter connectors either at the bay frame ground or at the office timing source. See office records.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-49

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-19 Synchronization cable (DS1 timing reference) connections

Conn.

Sync1

(J11)/

Sync2 (J12)

Jacket Color

Red BL

Gray

W 7

Drain 5

9-pin conn.

Special conn.

Rx1

Tx1

Rx2

Tx2

GND

Designation Name

RGO1/RGO2 Sync Output

TPO1/TPO2

RGI1/RGI2 Sync Input

TPI1/TPI2

GRD

Office alarm cable installation

Description

Office alarms are the common method used in a central office for maintenance personnel to quickly isolate a failure. Perform this procedure if connection to the office alarm system is required.

Note:

The office alarm relay contacts are rated at 50 VA which means that they are capable of switching 1 amp at 50 volts, or 2 amps at 25 volts. Their ability to switch large transient currents means that they can, if necessary, switch up to ten 5-watt aisle pilot lamps.

If transient voltages or currents are above these limits, transient noise-suppressing devices such as diodes or contact protection networks must be used to keep within the voltage and current limits. If these protection devices are not sufficient, an external buffer relay MUST be provided.

In all cases, and as a matter of good practice, suppression devices such as diodes or contact protection networks must be provided across any external relay coil being driven by the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to limit transient voltages and currents.

Office alarm cable assemblies are listed in

(p. 3-53)

Alarm mult

Office alarm cabling in a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend bay starts at the bottom shelf which is cabled directly to the office alarm system. Then as shelves are added to the bay, the office alarm connection is extended by multing the alarm cabling from shelf to shelf

(bottom to top). Alarm mults do not leave the bay.

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-50

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

For example, J13 of one shelf should be connected to the office alarm terminal. J14 of the same shelf should be connected to J13 of the shelf above shelf and the same procedure should be continued to connect more shelves.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Obtain the office alarm cable per

Table 3-20, “Office alarm cable assemblies” (p. 3-53) .

Connect the office alarm cable to ALM (J13) of the bottom Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf. See

Figure 3-15, “Office alarm cable connections” (p. 3-51)

Figure 3-15 Office alarm cable connections

................................................................................................................................................

Route the office alarm cable from the bottom shelf out of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend bay per Figure 3-16, “Office alarm cable routing” (p. 3-51) to the office alarm

panel.

Figure 3-16 Office alarm cable routing

................................................................................................................................................

Inspect the office alarm panel and add a contact protection network (if required).

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-51

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Cut the office alarm cable to the desired length.

................................................................................................................................................

Wire-wrap the loose end of the office alarm cable to the alarm panel, making connections as listed in

Table 3-20, “Office alarm cable assemblies” (p. 3-53)

Alarm Mult

The following steps should be performed when the bottom shelf in the bay will be directly connected to the office alarms. The cable added in this procedure is to mult office alarms in a bay to the bottom shelf. In this procedure the bottom shelf is multed to the shelf immediately above. That shelf is then multed to the shelf above it. Continue until the top shelf is connected.

Note:

In order for office alarms in a shelf (other than the bottom shelf) to be reported, all office alarm cable mults from that shelf to the bottom shelf must be in place. No shelf should be skipped.

................................................................................................................................................

Obtain the office alarm mult cable 848589602 for Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Connect one end to ALM MULT (J14) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. See

Figure 3-15, “Office alarm cable connections” (p. 3-51)

................................................................................................................................................

Route the office alarm mult cable to the side of the bay and connect it to ALM (J13) of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf above.See

Figure 3-16, “Office alarm cable routing”

(p. 3-51)

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat this procedure for each shelf in the bay (stopping at the top).

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

are listed in Table 3-22, “Miscellaneous discrete cable assemblies” (p. 3-57)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-52

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-20 Office alarm cable assemblies

Description

Office Alarm Cable

Cable assembly #

848558193

848562286

848562294

848562302

Office Alarm Mult Cable 848589602

Cable length

(feet)

100

150

250

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane connections

J13

J14 to J13

Table 3-21 Alarm office connections

Conn.

J13-J14

Pin# Color

BL-W

W-BL

O-W

W-O

Designation Name

RYMJV1

RYMJV2

RYMJA1

RYMJA2

Major Alarm Visible

Major Alarm Visible Return

Major Alarm Audible

Major Alarm Audible Return

G-W

W-G

BR-W

W-BR

RYMNV1

RYMNV2

RYMNA1

RYMNA2

Minor Alarm Visible

Minor Alarm Visible Return

Minor Alarm Audible

Minor Alarm Audible Return

S-W

W-S

BL-R

R-BL

RYCRV1

RYCRV2

RYCRA1

RYCRA2

Critical Alarm Visible

Critical Alarm Visible Return

Critical Alarm Audible

Critical Alarm Audible Return

Notes:

1. The SYSCTL circuit pack reports office alarms.

2. The connection to the central office alarms from P13 is run for each Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf assembly when used in a miscellaneously mounted individual application or from the first Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf assembly when mounted in a typical bay arrangement.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-53

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable installation

Description

The miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry access allows the maintenance center to control and monitor equipment collocated with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend.

The environmental control feature enables the maintenance center to remotely initiate up to four contact closures at the remote terminal (RT) for equipment operation such as pumps, generators, etc.

The environmental alarm status indications allow up to 18 miscellaneous user-settable alarm status indications (SI) at the remote terminal for transmission toward the central office.

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable assemblies and the length options

Steps

This procedure is performed for Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves requiring miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the miscellaneous discrete telemetry cable to the J20 MISC connector on the backplane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf per

Figure 3-17, “Miscellaneous discrete cable connection” (p. 3-55)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-54

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-17 Miscellaneous discrete cable connection

................................................................................................................................................

Route the cable out of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend bay per Figure 3-18,

“Miscellaneous discrete cable routing” (p. 3-55) to the telemetry panel.

Figure 3-18 Miscellaneous discrete cable routing

................................................................................................................................................

Cut the miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable to the desired length at the telemetry panel.

................................................................................................................................................

Wire-wrap the loose end of the miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry cable to

the wire-wrap terminal strip, making connections per Table 3-22, “Miscellaneous discrete cable assemblies” (p. 3-57) .

Note:

Each miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry designation is connected to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend by two leads (wires).

For each input, one lead should be connected to input-common and the other lead

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-55

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

should be connected to the appropriate alarm indication.

For each output, one lead should be connected to output-common and the other lead should be connected to the appropriate alarm indication.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning” for recommended

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-56

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-22 Miscellaneous discrete cable assemblies

Description

Miscellaneous discrete cable

Cable assembly #

848979399

848979407

848549598

848549606

848549614

848549622

848549630

100

150

250

350

Cable length

(feet)

Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend backplane connections

J20

Table 3-23 Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry connections

Conn.

J20

Pin#

Color

BL-W

W-BL

O-W

W-O

G-W

W-G

BR-W

W-BR

S-W

W-S

BL-R

R-BL

O-R

R-O

G-R

R-G

Designation

TLMI1

TLMI2

TLMI3

TLMI4

TLMI5

TLMI6

TLMI7

TLMI8

TLMI9

TLMI10

TLMI11

TLMI12

TLMI13

TLMI14

TLMI15

TLMI16

Name

Env. Input - #1

Env. Input - #2

Env. Input - #3

Env. Input - #4

Env. Input - #5

Env. Input - #6

Env. Input - #7

Env. Input - #8

Env. Input - #9

Env. Input - #10

Env. Input - #11

Env. Input - #12

Env. Input - #13

Env. Input - #14

Env. Input - #15

Env. Input - #16

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-57

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Conn.

Pin# Color Designation Name

BR-R

R-BR

S-R

R-S

TLMI17

TLMI18

TLMI19

TLMIC48VTR

Env. Input - #17

Env. Input - #18

Env. Input - #19

Input Common

BL-BK

BK-BL

O-BK

BK-O

G-BK

TLMO1

TLMO2

TLMO3

TLMO4

TLMOC

Env. Output - #1

Env. Output - #2

Env. Output - #3

Env. Output - #4

Output Common

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main optical fiber cable installation

Description

This section describes how to route the optical fiber cables from the interconnecting equipment (for example, an LGX

optical fiber distributing frame) to the OC-3/OC-

12/OC-48/OC-192 Main OLIUs of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend. This procedure does not cover routing the optical fiber cable between sites.

The optical fiber cables will be connected to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend after the circuit packs are installed. The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend requires single-mode fiber for the main OLIUs.

Note:

The optical fiber cable is fragile and must be protected. The fibers should be placed in a protective tube or channel, such as PVC tubing, or PANDUIT cable channel, when running the cable from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to the cable rack. The fibers should be placed in the cable rack in a protective channel with nothing on top of them. Cable ties should NOT be used with the optical fiber cables.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view an unterminated optical connector with optical instruments

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-58

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

WARNING

Laser hazard

Invisible laser radiation exists when unterminated. Avoid direct exposure of the eyes to the beam.

Note:

Prior to connecting the optical fiber cables, the fibers should be examined to ensure that they are clean. See

cleaning procedures.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Route the optical fiber cables from the interconnecting equipment into the left side of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend. See Figure 3-19, “Optical fiber routing” (p. 3-60) .

Note:

Protective covers must be left on cables.

Note:

Enough slack must be left in the fibers to allow them to be moved out of the way of the A/B 1 and 2 slots to allow circuit pack insertion and removal in those slots if required.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-59

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Figure 3-19 Optical fiber routing

................................................................................................................................................

Place the optical fiber cables in a protective tube or channel.

................................................................................................................................................

Label the optical fiber cables, indicating bay, shelf, pack, and direction (IN or OUT). See

Appendix E, “Fiber labeling” for more details.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning” for recommended

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-60

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 low-speed optical fiber cable installation

Description

This section describes how to route the single-mode fiber optical cables from the interconnecting equipment (for example, an LGX

optical fiber distributing frame) to the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 optical ports. This procedure does not cover routing the optical fiber cable between sites.

The optical fiber cables will be connected to the OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 optical ports after the circuit packs are installed.

Note:

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view an unterminated optical connector with optical instruments.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Invisible laser radiation exists when unterminated. Avoid direct exposure of the eyes to the beam.

Note:

Prior to connecting the optical fiber cables, the fibers should be examined to ensure that they are clean. See

cleaning procedures.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-61

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification. Determine the function slot where the pack will be inserted. The OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 pack can be inserted into either the D or G function slots.

................................................................................................................................................

Label the optical fiber cables, indicating bay, shelf, function group, pack, and direction

(IN or OUT).

................................................................................................................................................

Route optical fiber cables from the interconnecting equipment into the left side of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend and into the OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 optical ports. See

Figure 3-19, “Optical fiber routing” (p. 3-60)

................................................................................................................................................

Place the optical fiber cables in a protective tube or channel.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning” for recommended

100/1000BASE-X optical fiber cable installation

Description

This section describes how to route the optical fiber cables from the interconnecting equipment (for example, an LGX

optical fiber distributing frame) to the optical ports on

LNW63, LNW64, LNW74, LNW87, and LNW170 Ethernet circuit packs.

Single-mode fiber is required for LNW170 (1000Base-F ports).

Note:

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-62

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view an unterminated optical connector with optical instruments.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Invisible laser radiation exists when unterminated. Avoid direct exposure of the eyes to the beam.

Note:

Prior to connecting the optical fiber cables, the fibers should be examined to ensure that they are clean. See

cleaning procedures.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

See the engineering job specification. Determine the function slot that the pack will be inserted. If equipped with the VLF mains (LNW141 or LNW84) the 100/1000BASE-X pack can be inserted into any function slots D1, D2, G1 or G2. Otherwise, if equipped with the non-VLF mains the 100/1000BASE-X pack can be inserted only into function slots D1 or G1.

................................................................................................................................................

Label the optical fiber cables, indicating bay, shelf, function group, pack, and direction (IN or OUT).

................................................................................................................................................

Route optical fiber cables from the interconnecting equipment into the left side of the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend and into the 100/1000BASE-X optical ports. See

Table 3-19, “Optical fiber routing” (p. 3-60) .

................................................................................................................................................

Place the optical fiber cables in a protective tube or channel.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-63

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

CIT (RS-232) cable installation

Description

This section provides the procedure to connect the CIT (RS-232) cable from the LNW2

(SYSCTL) to a PC (serial port). This will allow communications between the PC and the

RS-232 port located on the LNW2.

CIT cable assemblies and the length options are listed in

Table 3-24, “CIT Cable

Assembly” (p. 3-64) .

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the RJ45 end of the CIT cable to the RS-232 jack located on the LNW2

(SYSCTL).

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the 9-pin D-type connector to the serial port on the PC.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

through 10BASE-T LAN cable then, see Table 3-26, “RJ-45 to DB-9 connector connections” (p. 3-65) .

Table 3-24 CIT Cable Assembly

Description

Front CIT cable

Cable assembly #

848748869

Cable length

8 feet

Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend connections

CIT/RS-232 jack on System

Controller (LNW2)

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-64

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 3-25 Standard CIT cable connection

Connection

Front CIT cable

RJ45 Connector

Pin# Designation

FRS232N

FDTR

Color

W - O 6

W - BL 4

9-Pin D-type connector

Pin# Designation

DCE Ready

DTE Ready

Ground

FTXD

W - G

Ground

Receive Data

6 FRXD G 3 Transmit Data

Notes:

1. The connection and the colors shown above are for a standard Alcatel-Lucent made cable. If you use a RJ-45 to DB-9 connector with a standard straight-

Table 3-26 RJ-45 to DB-9 connector connections

From RJ45 connector

Pin#

Color

Blue

Black

Red

To DB-9 pin D-type connector

Pin#

5 Green 2

6 Yellow 3

Notes:

1. The connection and the colors shown above are for RJ-45 to

DB-9 connector.

2. This connector should be used with a standard straight-through

10BASE-T LAN cable.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

3-65

Cable and fiber installation

........................................................................................................................................................................

Final operations

Description

Final check on cable installation.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that all the cables are properly dressed/connected.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that all cables are properly labeled.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that designations where cables were wire-wrapped are properly labeled.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that all the fibers are properly dressed/connected.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that all fibers are properly labeled. See Appendix E, “Fiber labeling” .

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that designations where fibers were terminated are properly labeled.

................................................................................................................................................

Replace rear cover on shelf if ordered.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Circuit pack compatibility

........................................................................................................................................................................

3-66

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4 Circuit pack installation

Overview

Purpose

This section provides information for performing the following:

•

Shelf powering

Circuit pack option settings and installation.

Detailed information on the function of each circuit pack is contained in Alcatel-Lucent

1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Applications and Planning Guide, 365-372-

324

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

Description

Powering

Initial circuit pack installation

Description

Overview

This section should be performed on all shelf installations.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-1

Circuit pack installation

Tools, test equipment, and accessories

Listed below are the tools, test equipment and accessories necessary to perform the procedures in this section.

Quantity Description

Screwdriver(s)

ESD Wrist Strap

Multimeter (Optional)

Personal Computer (PC)

CIT RS-232 Interface

Cable

Comments

A screwdriver(s) with the appropriate head(s) is

(are) required for securing the mounting screws, repositioning the mounting brackets, installing the interfacing cables, and for setting the circuit breakers to the OFF position.

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

The voltmeter must be capable of measuring DC voltage in the 40- to 60-volt range. The use of the voltmeter is optional since the shelf will alarm or shut down if the proper voltage is not supplied.

Required to run the WaveStar

CIT software.

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable

(Comcode 848748869). Required to connect the

PC to the CIT jack on the front of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

Powering

Overview

The following table lists the requirements for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer

Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf.

Table 4-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf power supply requirements

Item Description

Voltage range, all components -40.0V to -60.0V DC

Power feeders Two -48V power feeders

PWR A and PWR B

4-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Item Description

Voltage range, all components -40.0V to -60.0V DC

Circuit breakers (one per feeder) or fuse (one per feeder)

15.0 A

Steps

Verify that the frame or structure into which the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend Shelf is installed is properly grounded.

Verify that both 10 ampere circuit breakers on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend are in the OFF position. These breakers are located on the front of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Note:

A small flat-bladed screwdriver or other similar type tool is required to set the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend circuit breakers to the OFF position.

Disconnect the power cables from the backplane connectors PWR A on the right side of the shelf and PWR B on the left side of the shelf.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-3

Circuit pack installation

Figure 4-1 Power connections on Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane

If fuses are being used, install 25-ampere fuses in the battery distribution fuse board

(BDFB) that powers the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend A and B feeders.

If breakers are being used, verify that 25-ampere breakers are installed and switch the breakers to the ON position for the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend A and B feeders.

At the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend power cable connector, use a voltmeter and measure the voltage on the power cable between BAT A and BAT A RTN. Then measure the voltage between BAT B and BAT B RTN.

Designation

BAT A

BAT A RTN

BAT B

BAT B RTN

Color of power cable

Red

Blue

Color of internal shelf cable

Red

Red/Black

Red

Red/Black

Position on power cable connector facing connector with clip release up

Right

Left

Right

Left

Requirement: The voltage MUST be between -40.00 and -60.0 V DC.

4-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Reconnect the “A” feed of the power cable to the backplane connector (PWR A), and reconnect the “B” feed of the power cable to the backplane connector (PWR B).

Place both 10-ampere circuit breakers on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf in the

ON position.These breakers are located on the front of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Verify that the fans have started running.

At the BDFB either remove the fuse or put the circuit breaker, associated with the “B” feed of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, in the OFF position.

Verify the PWR A LED on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is lighted with only the “A” feed powered.

At the BDFB either insert the fuse or put the circuit breaker, associated with the “B” feed of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, in the ON position. Then either remove the fuse or put the circuit breaker, associated with the “A” feed of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, in the OFF position.

Verify the PWR B LED on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is lighted with only the “B” feed powered.

At the BDFB either insert the fuse or put the circuit breaker, associated with the “A” feed of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, in the ON position.

Verify that the both the PWR A LED and PWR B LED on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend user panel are lighted with both the “A” and “B” feeds powered.

Verify that the fans are still running and are moving air.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-5

Circuit pack installation

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 4-2, “R9.1 circuit pack slot compatibility” (p. 4-6) lists all the circuit packs that are

Circuit pack compatibility

Overview

compatible with R9.1 and their respective shelf locations (slots).

See

Figure 4-8, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf” (p. 4-9)

for slot locations.

Table 4-2 R9.1 circuit pack slot compatibility

Slot name

CTL

LNW2

G1, G2

A1/B1,

A2/B2 M1, M2

LNW7

LNW8

LNW16

LNW18

LNW19B

LNW20

LNW31

LNW37

LNW38

LNW39

LNW40

LNW41

LNW45

LNW49

LNW51

D1, D2

LNW7

LNW8

LNW16

LNW18

LNW19B

LNW20

LNW31

LNW37

LNW45

LNW49

4-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Slot name

CTL G1, G2

A1/B1,

A2/B2 M1, M2 D1, D2

LNW52

LNW55 LNW55

LNW62

LNW63

LNW64

LNW66

LNW73/73C

LNW74

LNW62

LNW84 LNW84

LNW87

LNW111

LNW112

LNW140 LNW140

LNW141 LNW141

LNW170

LNW302

LNW380

LNW382

LNW391

LNW402 LNW402

LNW601

LNW705

LNW785

LNW801

LNW8/

LNW801

177D

LNW785

LNW801

LNW8/

LNW801

177D

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-7

Circuit pack installation

Slot name

CTL G1, G2

A1/B1,

A2/B2 M1, M2 D1, D2

LNW43

LNW42

LNW96

LNW95

LNW98

Notes:

1 177D Apparatus Blanks are required in all unequipped function unit slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

2 This pack will only work in slot 1 unless the shelf is equipped with LNW141 or

LNW84.

3 The LNW705 can onbly be installed in the G2 slot.

4 The LNW8/LNW801 circuit packs have common functionality and they are directly interchangable. Therefore, an LNW8 and an LNW801 can occupy companion slots at the same time.

5 LNW43 Apparatus Blanks or LNW96 System Detectable Blanks are required in all unequipped A/B Slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

6 LNW42 Apparatus Blanks or LNW95 System Detectable Blanks are required in all unequipped Main Slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

7 System Detectable Blank Card for slots D and G. Apparatus Blanks are required in all unequipped function unit slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Switch fabric compatibility

When equipping high-speed slots, it is imperative that the switch fabric of the circuit packs located in Main 1 and Main 2 match.

Table 4-3 OC-3 mains with 6 STS-1s of vt switch fabric

OC-3 Circuit packs

LNW40

LNW601

LNW149

LNW302

Table 4-4 OC-12 mains with 12 STS-1s of vt switch fabric

OC-12 Circuit packs

LNW38

LNW380

LNW51

LNW382

4-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Table 4-5 OC-48 Mains with 48 STS-1s of vt switch fabric

OC-48 Circuit Pack2

LNW41

Table 4-6 OC-192 circuit packs with 192 STS-1s of vt switch fabric (VLF)

OC-192 Circuit Packs

LNW141 (VLF)

Table 4-7 OC3/12/48 circuit packs with 192 STS-1s of vt switch fabric (VLF)

OC-3/12/48 Circuit Pack

LNW82 (VLF)

Table 4-8 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf

Initial circuit pack installation

Description

This section provides instructions for installing, but not fully seating, circuit packs into the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. After circuit packs have been unpacked, they may be placed in their respective slots in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf but not fully engaged in the backplane connector. The circuit packs will be fully installed (seated) in the next section.

Note:

If office alarms are connected, it is advisable to disconnect the office alarm cable while performing the procedures in this section to prevent spurious alarms from being reported. Reconnect the office alarm cable after completion of all testing.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-9

Circuit pack installation

CAUTION

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unequipped D and G function unit slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unequipped Main slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unequipped A/B slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

CAUTION

ESD hazard

To protect against damage due to electrostatic discharge, a properly grounded ESD wrist strap must be worn when handling equipment.

LNW2 (SYSCTL) installation

Follow this procedure to install the LNW2 (SYSCTL) circuit pack into the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf.

Remove the SYSCTL circuit pack from the packing material.

Identify the CTL slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. See

Figure 4-8,

“Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf” (p. 4-9)

Place the SYSCTL circuit pack into the CTL slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Check off the appropriate box in the

that allows the center dividers to be removed. See Chapter 2, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665

OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main OLIU installation

•

Follow this procedure to install the following OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 main OLIU circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

LNW38 OC-12 IR

LNW40 OC-3 IR

•

LNW41 OC-48 PTM

LNW51 OC-12 LR

4-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

•

LNW84 OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 PTM

•

LNW140 OC-3 IR

LNW141 OC-192 PTM

•

LNW302 OC-3 PTM

LNW380 OC-12 LR

LNW382 OC-12 PTM

LNW601 OC-3 LR1

CAUTION

Equipment damage

The LNW38, LNW40, LNW51, LNW140, LNW380 and LNW601 OLIU circuit packs are equipped with optics that do not meet GR-78 R9-3 requirements on

ESD susceptibility. Always use proper ESD procedures when handling these

OLIU circuit packs to avoid equipment damage.

Note:

The LNW140, LNW141 and LNW84 require the comcode 849031372 shelf

DMXtend center divider”

for details on how to remove them.

Remove the first main OLIU circuit pack from the packing material.

Identify the M1 slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. See Figure 4-8, “Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf” (p. 4-9) .

Place the main OLIU circuit pack into the M1 slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Remove the second main OLIU from the packing material.

Identify the M2 slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. See Figure 4-8, “Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf” (p. 4-9) .

Place the second main OLIU circuit pack into the M2 slot on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf. Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-11

Circuit pack installation

Important!

If any of the main slots are to remain unequipped, install a LNW42 or

LNW95 apparatus blank to provide proper air flow for cooling. For LNW140, LNW141 or

LNW84 main OLIUs the center divider must be removed and in the unused slot a LNW98 apparatus blanks installed to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW7 (28DS1PM) and LNW8/LNW801 (56DS1E1) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW7 (28DS1PM) or LNW8/LNW801

(56DS1E1) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

is used.

The LNW7 is not supported when the LNW141 or LNW84 VLF main OLIU

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slots where

LNW7, LNW8, or LNW801 circuit packs will be installed.

Note:

The LNW8/LNW801 circuit packs have common functionality and they are directly interchangable. Therefore, an LNW8 and an LNW801 can occupy companion slots at the same time.

Remove the LNW7, LNW8, or LNW801 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

If a protection circuit pack is required, continue with

Step 5

If not, install a 177D or

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then

proceed to Step 8 .

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW7, LNW8 or LNW801 from the packing material.

4-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2, or G2 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

for each additional function group D or G to be equipped with LNW7, LNW8 or LNW801 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

If a protection circuit pack is required, continue with the Step 5 . If not, install a 177D or

LNW16 (12DS3/EC1) and LNW19B (48DS3/EC1) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW16 (12DS3/EC1) or LNW19B (48DS3/EC1) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) where LNW16 or LNW19B will be installed.

Remove the LNW16 or LNW19B from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then proceed to

Step 7

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW16 or LNW19B from the packing material.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-13

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

through Step 6 for each additional function group to be equipped with

LNW16 or LNW19B circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

If a protection circuit pack is required, continue with the Step 5 . If not, install a 177D or

LNW18 (12TMUX) and LNW20 (48TMUXDS3EC1) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW18 (12TMUX) or LNW20

(48TMUXDS3EC1) into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) where LNW18 or LNW20 will be installed.

Remove the LNW18 or LNW20 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW18 or LNW20 from the packing material.

4-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Table I-2, “Installation checklist” (p. I-6)

for each additional function group to be equipped with

LNW18 or LNW20 circuit pack.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW31 (OC-48 OLIU) low-speed installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW31 (OC-48 OLIU) circuit packs into the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) and/or growth slot(s) where LNW31 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW31 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

If a companion circuit pack is required, continue with the Step 5 . If not, install a 177D or

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then proceed to

Step 7

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW31 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required).

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-15

Circuit pack installation

Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 for each additional function group and/or growth slot to be

equipped with LNW31 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW37 (OC-3 4 port PTM OLIU) or LNW45 (OC-3 8 port PTM OLIU)

Follow this procedure if installing the LNW37 (OC-3 4 port PTM OLIU) or LNW45 (OC-

3 8 port PTM OLIU) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

The LNW37 or LNW45 circuit pack comes in separate boxes, with one box containing the circuit pack, and the other containing the ordered quantity of PTMs.

This procedure will consist of two parts.

– Install the circuit card

– Install the PTM.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) and/or growth slot(s) where LNW37 or LNW45 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW37 or LNW45 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

If a companion circuit pack is required, continue with

Step 5

. If not, install a 177D or

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW37 or LNW45 from the packing material.

4-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required).

for each additional function group and/or growth slot to be equipped with LNW37 or LNW45 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW39/LNW391 (DS1/DS3/16/3), LNW111 (3DS3) and LNW112 (16DS1) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW39/LNW391 (DS1/DS3/16/3), LNW111

(3DS3) or LNW112 (16DS1) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

The LNW39, LNW391, LNW111 and LNW112 are not supported when the

LNW140 main OLIU and LNW141 or LNW84 VLF main OLIU is used.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slots where

LNW39, LNW391, LNW111 or LNW112 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW39, LNW391, LNW111 or LNW112 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot A1/B1). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

If a protection circuit pack is required, continue with

Step 5

If not, install an LNW43 or

LNW96 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (A2/B2), then proceed to

Step 7

Important!

LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots A1/B1 and A2/B2 to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW39, LNW391, LNW111 or LNW112 from the packing material.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-17

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot A2/B2). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Check off the appropriate box in the

If a companion circuit pack is required, continue with the Step 5 . If not, install a 177D or

LNW49 (OC-12 4 port PTM OLIU) low-speed installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing the LNW49 (OC-12 4 port PTM OLIU) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

The LNW49 (OC-12 4 port PTM OLIU) circuit pack comes in separate boxes, with one box containing the circuit pack, and the other containing the ordered quantity of PTMs. This procedure will consist of two parts.

– Install the circuit card

– Install the PTM.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) and/or growth slot(s) where LNW49 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW49 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW49 from the packing material.

4-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required).

for each additional function group and/or growth slot to be equipped with LNW49 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

If a companion circuit pack is required, continue with the Step 5 . If not, install a 177D or

LNW62 (4 OC-48 PTM OLIU) or LNW55 (OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 12/4 port OLIU) low speed installation

(optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing the LNW62 (4 OC-48 PTM OLIU) or LNW55

(OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 12/4 PTM OLIU) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Note:

A deeper shelf cover (comcode 849064282) is required for shelves equipped with LNW55 OC3/OC12/OC48, LNW84 OC3/OC12/OC48, LNW705 XM10G/8, and/or LNW785 OMD, circuit packs. This shelf cover provides more space to prevent fibers from touching the front cover when the cover is closed.

Note:

The LNW62 and the LNW55 circuit packs require the LNW141 or LNW84

VLF main OLIU to be used.

Note:

The LNW62 and LNW55 circuit pack comes in separate boxes, with one box containing the circuit pack, and the other containing the ordered quantity of PTMs.

This procedure will consist of two parts.

– Install the circuit card

– Install the PTM.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group(s) and/or growth slot(s) where LNW62 or LNW55 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW62 or LNW55 from the packing material.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-19

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required), then

Repeat Step 7 through Step 6 for each additional function group and/or growth slot to be

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Remove the second LNW62 or LNW55 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D2 or G2 as required).

equipped with LNW62 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL) 8-port installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL) 8 port circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

The LNW63 (GBE PL) 4 port or LNW64 (GBE PL) 8 port requires either a

LX or SX PTM.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slot (D1 or G1) where the LNW63 or LNW64 circuit pack will be installed.

Note:

LNW63 or LNW64 circuit pack can only be installed in slot 1 of any function group unless the LNW141 or LNW84 VLF main OLIU is used. See Alcatel-Lucent

1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Applications and Planning Guide, 365-

372-324 for allowed combinations.

4-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Remove the LNW63 or LNW64 circuit pack from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the companion circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required).

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Step 4

for each additional function group to be equipped with

LNW63 or LNW64 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW73/73C (4-Fiber channel FICON/ESCON) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW73 or LNW73C circuit packs into the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slot (D1 or G1) where the LNW73/73C circuit pack will be installed.

Note:

LNW73/73C circuit pack can only be installed in slot 1 of any function group unless the LNW141 or LNW84 VLF main OLIU is used. See Alcatel-Lucent 1665

Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Applications and Planning Guide, 365-372-324 for allowed combinations.

Remove the LNW73/73C from the packing material.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-21

Circuit pack installation

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the companion circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required).

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

through Step 4 for each additional function group to be equipped with

LNW73 or 73C circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW66 (10/100T), LNW74 (10/100-PL), LNW87 (FE/GBE PL) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure if installing LNW66 (10/100T), LNW74 (10/100-PL), or LNW87

(

FE/GBE PL) circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slot (D1 or G1) where the LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 circuit pack will be installed.

Note:

The LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 circuit pack can only be installed in slot 1 of any function group. The LNW74 or LNW87 can be installed into any function slots

(D1, D2, G1 or G2) if the LNW141 or LNW84 VLF main OLIU is used. See Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Applications and Planning Guide,

365-372-324 for allowed combinations.

Note:

The LNW74 has 4 100BASE-LX ports that require PTM optics in addition to

16 10/100BASE-TX ports that are cabled from the rear of the shelf.

Note:

The LNW87 is a 8-port, PTM-based Private Line Fast Ethernet/Gigabit

Ethernet pack. The ports can be populated with either, 4 optical, 8 electrical PTMs, or a mix of 4 electrical and 4 optical PTMs.

4-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Remove the pack from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the companion circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required).

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Step 4

for each additional function group (slot D1 or G1 as required) to be equipped with LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW170 (GigE/FE)

Follow this procedure only if installing LNW70/170 circuit packs into the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

The LNW170 circuit packs support both electrical and optical PTMs for both gigE and FE. When inserting them into ports, provision the card appropriately.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slot (D-G) where the LNW70 or LNW170 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW170 from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-23

Circuit pack installation

If slot 2 is empty, install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the companion circuit pack slot.

Important!

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

through Step 4 for each additional function group to be equipped with

LNW170 circuit packs.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW402 OC48 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or DWDM PTM Optics

Follow this procedure to install the LNW402 circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf. The high-speed LNW402 is a single-port OLIU that employs PTM pluggable optics to offer 1310 nm, 1550 nm, or DWDM optics with a 12 STS-1 VT fabric.

The LNW402 circuit pack and three of the supported OC-48 PTMs are approved for OSP deployments.

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slots where the

LNW402 circuit packs will be installed.

Remove the first LNW402 circuit pack from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Repeat Step 2 through Step 4

and

Step 3

if a second LNW402 is required in the companion function/growth slot. If not, install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required).

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

4-24

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

if an additional function/growth group is to be equipped with an LNW402 circuit pack.

Check off the appropriate box in the

“Install pluggable modules” (p. B-8)

LNW705 XM10G/8 muxponder pack

Follow this procedure to install a LNW705 circuit pack in an Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend. The LNW705 XM10G/8 circuit pack multiplexes/demultiplexes up to 8 ports onto a single 10G wavelength. The LNW705 XM10G/8 circuit pack provides transport for the following types of signals:

OC-3/12/48, 1GE, FC, FICON and 2XFC

Note:

The LNW705 circuit packs require PTM modules for the optical interface.

This procedure will consist of two parts. Installing the circuit card and installing the

PTM per

Appendix B

, “PTM modules” (p. B-2)

See the engineering job specification. Identify the G2 slot where the LNW705 circuit pack will be installed.

Remove the LNW705 circuit pack from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot G2). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

See Appendix B ,

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-25

Circuit pack installation

Check off the appropriate box in “Installation checklist” (p. I-6)

LNW785 OMD5/8 8-channel low-loss DWDM optical mux/demux

Follow this procedure to install the LNW785 circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf. The LNW785 OMD5/8 circuit pack multiplexes/demultiplexes up to 8

DWDM optical channels.

Note:

See the engineering job specification. Identify the proper function group slots where the

LNW785 circuit packs will be installed.

Remove the first LNW785 circuit pack from the packing material.

Place the circuit pack into the shelf (slot D1 or G1 as required). Do NOT engage the circuit pack in the backplane connector.

Repeat Step 2 through Step 4

and

Step 3

if a second LNW785 is required in the companion function/growth slot. If not, install a 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into the protection circuit pack slot (D2 or G2 as required).

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

an LNW785 circuit pack.

if an additional function/growth group is to be equipped with

4-26

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Circuit pack installation

Check off the appropriate box in the

177D, LNW98 (Apparatus Blank) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure to install 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank(s) into the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks are required in all unused slots D and G to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Identify all the unequipped function unit (D or G) slots.

Remove the 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank from the packing material.

Place the 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank into an unequipped slots D and G on the shelf. Do NOT engage the blank pack in the backplane connector.

Continue with the next unequipped D and G slot until all the unused slots are equipped with an 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blank.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW43, LNW96 (apparatus blank) installation (optional)

Follow this procedure to installs LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blank(s) into the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

A LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blank is required in any unequipped A1/B1 or A2/B2 slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Identify any unequipped A1/B1 or A2/B2 slots.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

4-27

Circuit pack installation

Remove the LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blank from the packing material.

Place the LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blank into the unequipped A/B slot on the shelf.

Do NOT engage the blank pack in the backplane connector.

Continue with the next unequipped slot until all the unused A1/B1 or A2/B2 slots are equipped with an LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blank.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LNW42, LNW95 apparatus blank installation (optional)

Follow this procedure to install LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blank(s) into the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

A LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blank is required in any unequipped Main slots to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Identify any unequipped Main slots.

Remove the LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blank from the packing material.

Place the LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blank into the unequipped Main slot on the shelf.

Do NOT engage the blank pack in the backplane connector.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Stand-alone installation testing

4-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Part II: Stand-alone installation tests

Overview

Purpose

Part II covers Chapters 5 and 6. These sections cover the initial Graphical User Interface

(GUI) or Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) software installation and turn-up testing on a new

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf. It is intended to verify correct electrical DS1/DS3/FE cable wiring to the DSX panel or punch down block as well SONET fiber routing to the LGX panel from the faceplates of installed packs.

Part II also provides the recommended checklist

“Installation checklist”

to follow when installing a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend system. Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why. This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Contents

This part contains the following chapters:

Stand-alone node setup

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Tools, test equipment and accessories

This section lists the tools, test equipment and accessories needed to perform all the procedures in this installation manual.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

II-1

Stand-alone installation tests

Listed below are the required tools, test equipment and accessories.

Qty.

Description

Screwdriver(s)

Comments

The crimping tool and wire stripper are only required if installing DS3 cables. The replacement cassette is for the wire stripper tool.

Thomas & Betts

R-5648B

Crimping Tool

Paladin

†

Coaxial Wire

Stripper R-5648B

Replacement Paladin

†

Cassette R-5648B D5

Wire-Wrap Gun

R-4496A

1 The wire-wrap gun is required for terminating DS1/E1 cable and must be able to accommodate 24 gauge wire.

ESD Wrist Strap

R-4987C

Ohmmeter

ITE-6379C

DS1/E1 Error Rate Test Set

ITE-7113

DS3 Error Rate Test Set

ITE-7113

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

An ohmmeter is required to verify that the

Lucent 1665 DMXtend

Alcatel-

is properly grounded.

A DS1/E1 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS1/E1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

A DS3 error rate test set is required for testing of DS3 cabling. A T-BERD 209 or equivalent is recommended.

1 Optical Test Set (Optional) A Optical test set is required for testing of low speed optics OC3/12/48. An Omniber 718 or equivalent is recommended.

2 or 3 LC-type Optical Fiber

Jumper ITE-7169

(108918269)

Two optical fiber jumpers with LC type connectors are required to optically loop the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

II-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation tests

Qty.

Description Comments

1 15-dB LC-type LBO ITE-

7196 (108279480)

LBOs are only required when optically looping the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves containing optical circuit packs in any of the function unit slots; a single 15-dB LBO is required for testing of the individual ports

Noyes OFS 300-200X

Optical Fiber Scope

ITE-7129

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the optical fiber scope may not be needed

For use with the Noyes OFS 300-200X Optical Fiber

Scope

2.5mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D1

1.25mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D2

Noyes VFS-1 ITE-7187

Video Fiber Scope

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the video scope may not be needed

99% pure isopropyl alcohol

Individual presaturated alcohol wipes ITE-7136

CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette ITE-7137

CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette Replacement Reel

ITE-7137 D1

Luminex Stick port cleaners ITE-7134 & ITE-

7135

Luminex Cloth R-6033

Type A Reel

1.25 mm and 2.5 mm sizes

5.5” x 5.5”

Notes:

* Registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation

† Registered trademark of Paladin Corporation.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

II-3

Stand-alone installation tests

PC and cable requirements for WaveStar

CIT

This section lists the required equipment needed to run the WaveStar

CIT software with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Quantity

Description

Personal Computer

(PC)

RS-232 Interface

Cable

RJ45 to RJ45 Crossover Cable

Comments

See

Part II: “Stand-alone installation tests”

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable (Comcode 848748869)

II-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation tests

Installation checklist

Completed

Yes No Section and chapter Procedure

Chapter 5, “Stand-alone node setup”

“Software installation” (p. 5-2)

“Circuit pack installation” (p. 5-3)

Chapter 6, “Stand-alone installation testing”

CIT software” (p. 5-6)

“Steps” (p. 5-6)

“Circuit pack program version verification”

(p. 5-12)

“Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf initialization” (p. 5-13)

“LBO software settings” (p. 6-4)

“Clearing alarms” (p. 6-7)

“Local equipment and cross-connect tests”

(p. 6-8)

“DS1/E1 testing” (p. 6-9)

“DS3/EC1 testing procedure” (p. 6-15)

“LNW66 (10/100T), LNW74 (10/100),

LNW87 (FE/GBE PL) TX Ethernet cabling testing” (p. 6-22)

“OC-3 low-speed testing” (p. 6-26)

“OC-3 low-speed LNW37 PTM testing procedure” (p. 6-26)

Required

Yes

“OC-3 low-speed LNW45 or LNW55 PTM testing procedure” (p. 6-29)

“OC-12 low-speed LNW49 and LNW55 PTM testing procedure” (p. 6-31)

“OC-12 low-speed LNW49 and LNW55 PTM testing procedure” (p. 6-31)

“OC-48 low-speed testing procedure” (p. 6-34)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

II-5

Stand-alone installation tests

Section and chapter Procedure Required

Completed

Yes No

“OC-48 PTM equipped low-speed testing procedure” (p. 6-36)

“LED test” (p. 6-38)

Yes

“Office alarm test” (p. 6-39)

“Automatic protection switching and alarm test” (p. 6-43)

“Manual switching tests” (p. 6-47)

“External timing verification” (p. 6-50)

“Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry test” (p. 6-53)

“Modem connection test” (p. 6-57)

Notes:

1. Only required if equipped.

“Final operations” (p. 6-59)

Circuit pack installation

Yes

II-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5 Stand-alone node setup

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this chapter is to provide procedures for Graphical User Interface (GUI) or

Craft Interface Terminal (CIT) software installation and circuit packs provided via work order. Also, the use of the Graphical User Interface (GUI) or Craft Interface Terminal

(CIT).

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics

Software installation

Use of WaveStar

CIT software

Circuit pack program version verification

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf initialization

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Listed below are the required tools, test equipment and accessories.

Quantity Description

1 Personal Computer (PC)

Comments

Required to run the WaveStar

CIT software.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-1

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

Quantity Description Comments

1 CIT Interface Cable 8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable

(Comcode 848748869). Required to connect the PC to the CIT jack on the front of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

CIT Cross-Over Cable

Software CD-ROM

Software Release Description

(CRN)

LBOs

This cable is used for IAO LAN

(OSI/TCP-IP) Front LAN connection cross over cable should be used if the shelf is directly connected to a PC and LAN

10BASE-T straight through cable should be used if shelf is connected to a hub

Verify latest software version is being used.

Verify latest the issue of the CRN is being used, for the software that is used.

15-dB, 10-dB and 5-dB LBOs are required when looping back the main OLIUs on themselves.

PC minimum requirements

For PC minimum requirements see

“Installation checklist” (p. II-5)

Software installation

Description

Installation of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend) WaveStar

CIT software is covered in detail in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Software Release Description, which is provided with the software CD. To install the CIT software, please follow the procedures in the “Installing software and documentation on a PC” section of the CRN.

Software installation

CIT software installation is accomplished by performing the “Installing software and documentation on a PC” section in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend

(DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Software Release Description which is shipped with the software CD. When the software installation is complete, check off the appropriate box in the

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit pack installation

Description

This section provides instructions and the recommended order for installing (fully seating) the circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. The procedures in this section assume that the SYSCTL is installed and operational.

Locations of circuit packs (function unit slots) are shown in Figure 4-8, “Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf” (p. 4-9)

Circuit packs are keyed to prevent being inserted into the wrong shelf position. Installing circuit packs requires some force.

CAUTION

When installing the circuit packs, be careful to insert them straight to avoid damaging the backplane pins.

When a circuit pack is installed, its

FAULT

LED will light for several seconds then extinguish.

CAUTION

ESD hazard

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap MUST be worn when handling circuit packs.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend center divider” (p. 2-5)

Note:

The UPD/INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL circuit pack is recessed and will require a pointed object.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-3

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Fully insert one or both (if two are equipped) M1 and M2 OLIUs into the shelf.

CAUTION

Equipment damage

The LNW38, LNW40, LNW51, LNW140, LNW302, LNW380, LNW382, and

LNW601 OLIU circuit packs are equipped with optics that do not meet GR-78

R9-3 requirements on ESD susceptibility. Always use proper ESD procedures when handling these OLIU circuit packs to avoid equipment damage.

Note:

Using a gentle steady pressure on both ends of the circuit pack, slide the circuit pack into the slot until it is fully seated. Then close the faceplate latch and tighten the retainer screw on the other end.

Note:

The LNW140, LNW141, and LNW84 require shelf comcode 849031372 with the center dividers removed. See

Chapter 2

to remove the dividers

Note:

................................................................................................................................................

Fully seat LNW42 or LNW95 Apparatus Blanks in any unequipped Main slots. For

LNW140, LNW141 or LNW84 main OLIUs the center divider must be removed and in the unused slot a LNW98 apparatus blanks installed to provide proper air flow for cooling.

Note:

................................................................................................................................................

If the LNW41 (OC-48), LNW141 (OC-192) or LNW84 (OC-3/OC-12/OC-48) mains are

being used, insert the PTMs at this time. See Appendix B, “PTM modules”

for proper insertion.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect IN to OUT on the OLIU in the M1 slot of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using an optical fiber jumper cable and a 15-dB LBO. See

Any other alarms will be cleared later on in Chapter 6, “Stand-alone installation testing”

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

Connect IN to OUT on the OLIU in the M2 slot of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using an optical fiber jumper cable and a 15-dB LBO.

CAUTION

Equipment damage

The LNW38, LNW40, LNW51, LNW140, LNW302, LNW380, LNW382, and

LNW601 OLIU circuit packs are equipped with optics that do not meet GR-78

R9-3 requirements on ESD susceptibility. Always use proper ESD procedures when handling these OLIU circuit packs to avoid equipment damage.

Result:

After a few minutes the flashing FAULT LEDs should extinguish on each

OLIU circuit pack. If the shelf is externally timed the flashing FAULT LEDs may not extinguish until correct framing is selected. The FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs will light on the SYSCTL due to DCC alarms created by optically looping the OLIUs. These

SYSCTL LEDs will remain lit until the DCC is disabled in the

“Clearing alarms”

(p. 6-7) section.

................................................................................................................................................

Starting with slot A1/B1, fully seat the circuit pack slotted there using a steady pressure on both of the faceplate latches (where applicable) at the same time until the circuit pack is fully seated.

Note:

The ACTIVE and FAULT LEDs should light when circuit packs are inserted and the FAULT LED should extinguish after a short period of time.

Note:

For slots A1/B1 and A2/B2 only; using a gentle steady pressure on both ends of the circuit pack, slide the circuit pack into the slot until it is fully seated. Then close the faceplate latch.

................................................................................................................................................

Continue seating circuit packs with slot A2/B2 and then on to G1, G2, D1, and D2.

Note:

Some circuit packs such as the LNW63, LNW66, and LNW170 may take several minutes before their FAULT LEDs extinguish.

................................................................................................................................................

Fully seat 177D or LNW98 Apparatus Blanks in any other unfilled D and G slots.

................................................................................................................................................

Fully seat LNW43 or LNW96 Apparatus Blanks in any A/B unfilled slots.

Note:

Using a gentle steady pressure on both ends of the circuit pack, slide the circuit pack into the slot until it is fully seated. Then close the faceplate latch.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-5

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

If there are any FAULT LEDs on or flashing on any of the inserted circuit packs; press the

UPD/INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

Result:

The operation of the UPD/INIT pushbutton on the SYSCTL circuit pack will update the system and should clear any flashing FAULT LEDs on any of the low speed circuit packs.

................................................................................................................................................

If FAULT LEDs remain lit on any of the inserted circuit packs, replace the respective circuit pack.

................................................................................................................................................

“Clearing alarms” (p. 6-7) .

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 3-24, “CIT Cable Assembly” (p. 3-64) ]. Or connect the PC LAN port

Use of WaveStar

CIT software

Description

Complete the following steps to login to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend via

WaveStar

CIT. It is assumed that the CIT software has been installed on the PC and the

LNW2 system controller is installed and operational to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf per the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Release 9.1.0

Software Release Description.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the PC serial port to the RS-232 port of the SYSCTL circuit pack with a serial

RS-232 cable [

to the front LAN port of the SYSCTL circuit pack with a RJ45 to RJ45 cross-over cable

Table 3-15, “LAN 10Base-T straight-through cable connections” (p. 3-44)

Note:

An IP address must be assigned to the NIC card on the PC or laptop.

Otherwise, you may experience login problems. To assign an IP address, start the DOS

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

prompt on the computer, and type the command ipconfig/all. The command will show an IP address line. If there is no address line or 0.0.0.0 for an IP address, then you must assign an IP address to the NIC card of the computer.

................................................................................................................................................

Start the WaveStar

CIT software on the PC by double clicking on the WaveStar

icon that was created by the installation procedure.

The following windows appear:

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-7

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

If necesssary, enter the following in the Login window: Note: User ID and password are

case sensitive.

User ID:

LUC01

Password: LUC+01

Note:

When the CIT is installed, there is an optional step to enable or disable CIT logins. This screen shot would not be displayed if the user chose to disable CIT logins.

................................................................................................................................................

Click

to connect. The screen appears:

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

After reading the Legal Notice, click

and the following window appears.

................................................................................................................................................

Under

NE Name

, enter LT-DMXTEND.

................................................................................................................................................

Under

NE Type

, select DMXtend from the drop-down list.

................................................................................................................................................

Under Connection Type, click on the drop-down menu arrow and choose Serial, OSI, or

TCP/IP depending on the type of connection you are using.

Note:

TCP/IP is available when the SYSCTL has a bootcode of 5.1 or higher. The

SYSCTL (LNW2) displays the boot code on initial turn up and the 5.1 bootcode is indicated by a flashing M P 5 1 in the display. When the bootcode is 5.1 or higher, the

SYSCTL has a default IP address of 169.254.1.1. If the PC’s LAN card to is configured as DHCP, the SYSCTL will provide the PC with an IP address within a minute or so. Connection through TCP/IP is now possible using the default IP address of 169.254.1.1.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-9

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Graphical

and the NE login screen appears.

................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Login information (case sensitive)for the shelf:

User ID:

LUC01

Password

DMXTND2.5G

Click

and the NE legal notice appears.

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click

and the System View appears.

................................................................................................................................................

Familiarize yourself with different aspects of the Graphical presentation of a shelf including tool bars and menu bars.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-11

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

Circuit pack program version verification

Description

This section provides instructions verifying that program versions on the circuit packs in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. The procedures in this section assume that the

SYSCTL is installed and the circuit packs have been installed in the shelf as described in the preceding sections.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Log on to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using the CIT software as described in the

the CRN, reseat that circuit pack and wait 15 minutes, and repeat this procedure from Step

................................................................................................................................................

In the System View, select

View > Equipment

Result:

All packs inserted into the shelf are displayed.

................................................................................................................................................

Click on an installed circuit pack.

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Select

to issue the command.

Result:

The circuit pack information is displayed. If the circuit pack has a program associated with it, the version number will be displayed next to Program Version:.

Compare it to the table of Program Versions in Chapter 6 of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Software Release Description.

................................................................................................................................................

Compare the Program Version to the information provided in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Release 9.1.0 Software Release Description.

Note:

OLIU circuit packs are not considered “smart packs”, therefore will not provide program version. The exception is the VLF Mains.

................................................................................................................................................

If the Program Version did not match the version number in the Firmware Version table in

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf initialization

Description

This section provides instructions for initializing the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, to ensure that all circuit pack databases are correct for the current shelf and software release. The procedures in this section assume that the SYSCTL is installed and the circuit packs have all been installed in the shelf as described in the preceding sections.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Log on to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using the CIT software as described in

the “Use of WaveStar

................................................................................................................................................

From the System View, select Fault > Reset > Initialize System.

Result:

Click OK.

................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to the Warning Message.

Result:

The shelf resets and closes the CIT session.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Local equipment and cross-connect tests

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

5-13

Stand-alone node setup

........................................................................................................................................................................

5-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6 Stand-alone installation testing

Overview

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to verify proper transmission cabling installation and R9.1 functionality as well as the associated functionality of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) shelf.

For end-to-end turn-up and testing procedures, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer

Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide, 365-372-325.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

LBO software settings

Clearing alarms

DS1/E1 testing

DS3/EC1 testing

LNW66, LNW74, and LNW87 testing

OC-3 low-speed testing

OC-12 low-speed testing

OC-48 low-speed testing

LED test

Office alarm test

Automatic protection switching and alarm test

Manual switching tests

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-1

Stand-alone installation testing

External timing verification

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry test

For PC minimum requirements see

6-53

Modem connection test

Final operations

6-57

6-59

6-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Listed below are the required tools, test equipment and accessories. For complete listing, see Part I or Part II:

Quantity

2 or 3

Description

Screwdriver(s)

ESD Wrist Strap

DS1/E1 Error Rate

Test Set

DS3 Error Rate

Test Set

LC-type Optical

Fiber Jumper

(108918269)

15 dB LC-type

LBO (108279480)

Comments

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs.

Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

A DS1/E1 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS1/E1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

A DS3 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS3/EC1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

Two optical fiber jumpers with LC-type connectors are required to optically loop the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

For shelves containing optical circuit packs in any of the function unit slots (supported starting in release R1.1), a single 15-dB LBO is required for testing of the individual ports

Required to run the WaveStar

CIT software.

Personal Computer

(PC)

CIT (RS-232)

Interface Cable

LAN 10BaseT

Straight-through

Cable CAT 5 or better

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable (Comcode

848748869). Required to connect the PC to the CIT jack on the front of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

As required to reach from front of Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend to the RJ45 patch panel

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-3

Stand-alone installation testing

Quantity Description Comments

1 Personal Computer (PC) Required to run the WaveStar

CIT software.

1 CIT Interface Cable

CIT Cross-Over Cable

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable

(Comcode 848748869). Required to connect the PC to the CIT jack on the front of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

This cable is used for IAO LAN

(OSI/TCP-IP) Front LAN connection cross over cable should be used if the shelf is directly connected to a PC and LAN

10BASE-T straight through cable should be used if shelf is connected to a hub

Software CD-ROM

Software Release Description

(CRN)

LBOs

Verify latest software version is being used.

Verify latest the issue of the CRN is being used, for the software that is used.

15-dB, 10-dB and 5-dB LBOs are required when looping back the main OLIUs on themselves.

PC minimum requirements

LBO software settings

Description

This section provides instructions for setting the software Line Build Out (LBO) for the

DS1/E1 and DS3/EC1 cabling. The SYSCTL, DS1/E1 and/or DS3/EC1 circuit packs must be installed and software must be loaded.

Follow this procedure to set the LBOs for the DS1/E1, DS1/DS3/16/3, DS3/EC1, and

TMUX circuit packs.

6-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Setting DS1/E1 LBOs

Log on to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf using the CIT software as described in

the “Use of WaveStar

See the following table of cable lengths and LBO values. Determine the LBO value corresponding to the DS1/E1 cables installed.

LBO value

100

Distance (feet)

Cable type 1161A

0 - 133 (default)

133 - 267

267 - 420

420 - 550

550 - 655

Use the

GUI

window click on

Configuration:Equipment

command.

Double-click on a Function Group where the

LNW7/LNW8/LNW112/LNW39/LNW140/LNW391/LNW801/LNW84 is located.

Select VT Group1 and the first DS1/E1 in that group.

Result:

A provisioning page will be displayed.

Select Line Build Out 20 (0,133) from the drop-down window.

Select Apply to: All Ports, This Pack

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

Result:

All DS1/E1 ports will have a LBO value of 20 for this pack.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-5

Stand-alone installation testing

Setting DS3/EC1 LBOs

The DS3/EC1 cabling will be tested with all ports provisioned for DS3. Set DS3 LBO values as follows.

See the following table of cable lengths and LBO values. Determine the LBO value corresponding to the DS3 cables installed:

LBO Value

OUT

Distance (Feet)

Cable Type 735A and

734D

0 - 65 (default)

> 65

Use the GUI window click on

Configuration:Equipment

command.

Double-click on a Function Group where the LNW16/LNW18/LNW19B/LNW20 or

LNW39/LNW111/LNW391/LNW84 is located.

Select Port 1 and the first DS3 in that group.

Result:

A provisioning page will be displayed.

Select Line Build Out = In from the drop down window.

Select Apply to: All Ports, This Pack

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

Result:

All DS3 ports will have a LBO value of In for this pack.

Check off the appropriate box in the

6-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Clearing alarms

Description

In order to clear standing alarms the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend synchronization will be optioned for “Free Running.” The DCC will be disabled in order to prevent DCC alarms from being generated due to the optical loopback on the main OLIUs.

Use t the

GUI

to change the system timing.

Configuration > Timing Sync

The

Configure Timing/Sync

window will be displayed.

Under the

System Timing

tab set the

Timing Mode:

Free Running

Click

to issue the command.

Use the

GUI

to turn off the DCCs.

Configuration > DCC Terminations

The

Configure DCC Terminations

window will be displayed.

For

Port AID:

select dcc-m1-1.

For

OSI Over DCC

select

disabled.

Click Apply to send the command.

For

Port AID:

select dcc-m2-1.

For

OSI Over DCC

select

disabled.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-7

Stand-alone installation testing

Click Apply to send the command.

If there are any FAULT LEDs on or flashing, press the UPD/INIT pushbutton on the

SYSCTL circuit pack.

Note:

LNW16/LNW19B (DS3/EC1), LNW18/LNW20 (48TMUXDS3EC1),

LNW111 (3DS3) and LNW39/LNW391/LNW84 (DS1/DS3/16/3) circuit packs require a 75-ohm termination at the DSX-3 on all ports.

If there are still FAULT LEDs on, replace the respective circuit pack.

Leave the office alarm cable disconnected until all procedures and testing have been completed.

Check off the appropriate box in the

It is assumed that Chapter 4, “Circuit pack installation”

Local equipment and cross-connect tests

Description

The tests in this section verify the proper operation of the circuit packs and the circuit pack positions in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. It verifies proper cabling from the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend to the DSX cross-connect panel or connecting equipment.

The shelf must successfully pass this test before testing any other feature of the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

is complete and the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf has fiber loopback cables on the Main OLIUs, with Far-End

Communication disabled and synchronization set to free-running.

On initial installation/turn-up of Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, there are no default cross-connects. All cross-connects need to be entered for these tests. Upon completion of this test, all cross-connections will be deleted.

6-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Note:

If the shelf is not fully equipped, move circuit packs around and repeat the test. Test all circuit pack positions which have DSX cabling.

Note:

After completing this test, isolate and correct any incorrect wiring or isolate and replace any failed units. If any cabling is corrected or units replaced, repeat the

Local Equipment and cross-connect tests until the units pass without failures.

CAUTION

ESD hazard

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap MUST be worn when handling circuit packs.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

DS1/E1 testing

DS1/E1 testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit slots that are cabled to a DSX-1.

Function unit slot A/B must be cabled to the DSX-1 and must contain a DS1/DS3/16/3

(LNW39/LNW391/LNW84), 16/DS1 (LNW112) or OC-3/16DS1 (LNW40) circuit pack in order to perform these tests on the DS1/E1 portion of the cabling. function unit slot D or

G must be cabled to the DSX-1 and must contain either a 28DS1 (LNW7) or 56DS1E1

(LNW8/LNW801) circuit pack in order to perform these tests. If the shelf is not fully populated, it may be necessary to move the circuit pack(s) from slot to slot in order to test all DS-1 cabling.

Note:

The LNW39/LNW391/LNW84 (DS1/DS3/16/3), LNW112 (16DS1) or the

OC-3/16DS1 (LNW140) circuit packs only support the first 16 DS1’s of the A function group.

This procedure requires the use of a DS1/E1 test set.

Set the DS1/E1 test set to transmit and receive a Quasi-Random Sequence Signal (QRSS) with B8ZS formatting.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-9

Stand-alone installation testing

Connect a cable from the DS-1 test set transmit connection to the IN jack of the DSX-1 associated with the DS-1 tributary to be tested (start with the first).

Connect a cable from the DS-1 test set receive connection to the OUT jack of the DSX-1 associated with the DS-1 tributary to be tested (start with the first).

Result:

The DS-1 test set should indicate a blue (AIS) signal is being received.

Use the GUI command to enter cross-connects.

Click Configuration: Cross-Connections.

Select Create a new cross-connection.

Select Next.

Select Rate= VT1.5: Type of Cross-connect= UPSR Add/Drop.

Select Next.

Select Range= Single VT.

Select m1-1-1-1-1 to a1-1-1-1 (if using a combo card) or [d,g] if using the function slots.

Click Finish to issue the command.

Result:

The DS-1 test set should indicate it is receiving an error free QRSS signal with

B8ZS formatting.

6-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

If an error-free signal is not received:

•

Verify that the DS-1 line coding format is set to B8ZS using the

View:equipment:VT

Group

command

Verify that the LBOs are set according to cable length using the

View:equipment:VT

Group

command [see

“Setting DS1/E1 LBOs” (p. 6-5) ].

•

Check DS-1 cabling for proper connections.

Check the Test set for proper framing.

Use the GUI command to delete the cross-connect.

Click Configuration:Cross-Connections.

Select Delete legs of an Existing cross-connection.

Select Next.

Click on the

main (OC-N).

Double click on port 1 (OC-N).

Select Next.

Select Finish.

Click Yes.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-11

Stand-alone installation testing

Result:

The DS-1 test set should indicate a blue (AIS) signal is being received in place of the QRSS signal.

Remove the test set connections from the DSX-1.

Use the e

GUI

to send an

upd-sys

command.

Click on

Configuration > Update System > Update All

Click

Yes

to issue the command.

Result:

This command will remove alarms generated by removing the test signals from the DSX-1.

through Step 27 to test each of the remaining DS-1 tributaries of the

function unit, substituting the following address information.

Tributary

@ DSX-1

Cross-connect

m1-1-1-1-2,a1-1-1-2 m1-1-1-1-3,a1-1-1-3 m1-1-1-1-4,a1-1-1-4 m1-1-1-2-1,a1-1-2-1 m1-1-1-2-2,a1-1-2-2 m1-1-1-2-3,a1-1-2-3 m1-1-1-2-4,a1-1-2-4 m1-1-1-3-1,a1-1-3-1 m1-1-1-3-2,a1-1-3-2 m1-1-1-3-3,a1-1-3-3 m1-1-1-3-4,a1-1-3-4 m1-1-1-4-1,a1-1-4-1 m1-1-1-4-2,a1-1-4-2

6-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Tributary

@ DSX-1 Cross-connect

15 m1-1-1-4-3,a1-1-4-3

* m1-1-1-4-4,a1-1-4-4 m1-1-1-5-1,d1-1-5-1 m1-1-1-5-2,d1-1-5-2 m1-1-1-5-3,d1-1-5-3 m1-1-1-5-4,d1-1-5-4 m1-1-1-6-1,d1-1-6-1 m1-1-1-6-2,d1-1-6-2 m1-1-1-6-3,d1-1-6-3 m1-1-1-6-4,d1-1-6-4 m1-1-1-7-1,d1-1-7-1 m1-1-1-7-2,d1-1-7-2 m1-1-1-7-3,d1-1-7-3 m1-1-1-7-4,d1-1-7-4

Notes:

1 The LNW39/LNW391/LNW84

(DS1/DS3/16/3), LNW112 (16DS1) or the

OC-3/16DS1 (LNW140) circuit packs only supports the first 16 DS1’s of the A function group.

When testing cabling for a function unit slot other than A, replace the

in each of the above addresses with the letter (

) corresponding to the function unit under test.

Note:

Cross-connect m-2-1-1-1 to d-2-1-1 through m-2-1-1-28 to d-2-7-4 when using the second STS1 of the LNW8 circuit pack.

Repeat this procedure for each function unit cabled to a DSX-1 via DS1/E1 cabling.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Repeat Step 1 through Step 7 for each DS1/E1 cabled to the DSX-1.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-13

Stand-alone installation testing

DS1/E1 non-terminating equipment transmission testing (LNW84 without optics)

Perform this test when the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is equipped with LNW84 without optics in the main slots.

Facility Loopback testing allows the installer to verify the electrical cabling to the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend NE. Follow the procedure below to perform a facility loopback test at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

To test cabling to the DSX-1, use a DS1/E1 test set to transmit and receive toward the facility loopback.

Perform the following tests for each DS1/E1 circuit cabled to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend.

Select

Fault > Analysis > Loopback

...

Choose the DS1/E1 port to test and click

Select

Select

Operate

and

Loopback Type: Facility

and click

Apply

Once the loopback is up, a test signal is generated at the DS1/E1 terminating equipment which will verify that the cabling is correct.

Note:

A test set can be applied at the DSX-1 to test cabling toward the facility loopback.

Once the test is complete, remove the loopback.

Select Fault > Analysis > Loopback

...

Choose the DS1/E1 port to test and click Select.

Select

Release

and

Loopback Type: Facility

and click

Apply

6-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Check off the appropriate box in the

Repeat Step 1 through Step 5

DS3/EC1 testing

DS3/EC1 testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit slots containing the following circuit packs and cabled to the DSX:

– LNW16 (12DS3/EC1)

– LNW18 (12TMUX)

– LNW19B (48DS3/EC1)

– LNW20 (48TMUXDS3EC1)

– LNW39/LNW391 (DS1/DS3/16/3)

– LNW111 (3 DS3)

– LNW84 (3 DS3)

If the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is cabled to some other type of DS3/EC1 terminating equipment, use this procedure by substituting these ports for the DSX-3 ports called out in the procedure.

If the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is not fully populated, it may be necessary to move the circuit pack(s) from slot to slot in order to test all DS3/EC1 cabling.

This procedure requires the use of a DS3 test set.

Note:

The LNW16/LNW19B circuit packs are provisioned on a “per-port” basis for

DS3 or EC1. The default setting for all ports is DS3. Tests in the section will verify proper cabling by using a DS3 test set with all ports provisioned as DS3.

The LNW39/LMW391/LNW84 (DS1/DS3/16/3) pack’s DS3 portion is only provisionable for DS3.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-15

Stand-alone installation testing

Verify provisioning

This procedure will verify provisioning.

For the LNW16 or LNW19B, verify that all ports are provisioned for DS3.

Use the

GUI View:Equipment

command.

Click on each DS3 port

Result:

All ports are provisioned as DS3.

To provision a port to DS3, from the GUI choose Configuration:Equipment Select the

DS3 port, click Select.

Choose Electrical Interface Type = DS3:Signal Format = Framed.

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

LNW19B circuit pack(s).

for each Function Group equipped with LNW16 or

Transmission test

Perform the remaining steps in this procedure for all Function Groups equipped with

LNW16 (12DS3/EC1), LNW19B (48DS3/EC1) or LNW39/LNW391/LNW84

(DS1/DS3/16/3) circuit packs.

Set the DS3 test set to transmit and receive a framed Pseudo Random Bit Stream (PRBS)

DS3 test signal CBIT or M13 (M13 is default).

M13 should be used to test LNW39/LNW391/LNW84 (DS1/DS3/16/3).

6-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Connect a cable from the DS3 test set transmit connection to the IN jack of the DSX-3 associated with the first DS3 tributary of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend function unit slot to be tested.

Connect a cable from the DS3 test set receive connection to the OUT jack of the DSX-3 associated with the first DS3 tributary of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend function unit slot to be tested.

Result:

The DS3 test set should indicate a blue (AIS) signal is being received for a

DS3 pack.

Use the GUI command to enter cross-connects.

Click Configuration:Cross-Connections.

Select Create a new cross-connection.

Select Next.

Select Rate= STS1: Type of Cross-connect= UPSR Add/Drop.

Select Next.

Select main1-1-1 to [b,d,g]1-1.

Click Finish to issue the command.

Requirement:

The DS3 test set should indicate it is receiving an error free PRBS signal.

To check that the port on the DS3 pack is receiving the signal, verify that the port has transitioned to an “in service” state with the View:Equipment command.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-17

Stand-alone installation testing

Result:

The DS3 provisioning will be displayed, along with the port state (last parameter). A port state of "IS" indicates that the pack is receiving a good signal to the port

While observing the error-free transmission, grasp the DS3 cable about two inches from the BNC connector head and gently rotate (twist) the cable in a clockwise and counterclockwise direction about 45 degrees (gently).

Result:

If any errors are detected while performing this "wiggle test", the BNC connector must be cut off and replaced.

•

If an error free signal is not received:

Check the LBOs settings using the View:Equipment command (see “Setting DS1/E1

LBOs” (p. 6-5) .

Verify that the pack is provisioned for the framing format being sent from the test set,

CBIT or M13.

Verify that the port is provisioned for DS3.

Check the DS3/EC1 cabling for proper connections.

Use the GUI command to delete the cross-connect.

Click Configuration:Cross-Connections.

Select Delete legs of an Existing cross-connection.

Select Next.

Click on the

main (OC-N).

Double click on port 1 (OC-N).

Select Next.

6-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Select Next.

Select Finish.

Click Yes.

Result:

The DS3 test set should indicate a blue (AIS) signal is being received in place of the PRBS signal.

Remove the test set connections from the DSX-3.

Use the e

GUI

to send an

upd-sys

command.

Click on

Configuration > Update System > Update All

Repeat Step 2 through

Step 26

to test cabling to each of the remaining DS3 tributaries of the function unit. Substitute the following address.

Tributary

@ DSX-3

Cross-connect address

m1-1-2,d1-2 m1-1-3,d1-3 m1-1-4,d1-4 m1-1-5,d1-5 m1-1-6,d1-6 m1-1-7,d1-7 m1-1-8,d1-8 m1-1-9,d1-9

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-19

Stand-alone installation testing

11 m1-1-10,d1-10 m1-1-11,d1-11

12 m1-1-12,d1-12

Notes:

1 The LNW39/LNW391/LNW84

(DS1/DS3/16/3) circuit pack only supports 3

DS3’s from the b function group

When testing cabling for a function unit slot other than d, replace the

in each of the above addresses with the letter (

) corresponding to the function unit slot under test.

Note:

If the mains are equipped with LNW141s, LNW140s or LNW84s and either a

LNW19B are equipped in the function slots then m1-1-13, d1-13 through m1-1-48, d1-48 should be tested.

Repeat this procedure for each function unit slot cabled to a DSX-3 via DS3/EC1 cabling.

Check off the appropriate box in the

“Verify that the port is provisioned for

DS3 terminating equipment loopback testing (LNW84 without optics)

Perform this test when the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is equipped with LNW84 without optics in the main slots.

Facility loopback testing allows the installer to verify the electrical cabling to the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend NE. Follow the procedure below to perform a facility loopback test at the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. When the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is cabled to other DS3 terminating equipment, in order to complete the loopback testing, it will be necessary to contact the Customer Network Control Center and have a signal established at the port(s) under test.

To test cabling to the DSX-3, use a DS3 test set to transmit and receive toward the facility loopback.

Perform the following tests for each DS3 circuit cabled to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend.

Select

Fault > Analysis > Loopback

...

6-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Choose the DS3 port to test and click Select.

Select

Operate

and

Loopback Type: Facility

and click

Apply

Once the loopback is up, a test signal is generated at the DS3 terminating equipment which will verify that the cabling is correct.

Note:

A test set can be applied at the DSX-3 to test cabling toward the facility loopback.

While observing the error free transmission, grasp the DS3 cable about two inches from the BNC connector head and gently rotate (twist) the cable in a clockwise and counter clockwise direction about 45 degrees (gently).

Result:

If any errors are detected while performing this "wiggle test," the BNC connector must be cut off and replaced.

•

If an error free signal is not received:

Check the LBOs settings using

View > Equipment

(see

“Setting DS3/EC1 LBOs”

(p. 6-6) .

Verify that the pack is provisioned for the framing format being sent from the test set,

CBIT or M13.

Verify that the port is provisioned for DS3. See

DS3.” (p. 6-18) .

Check the DS3/EC1 cabling for proper connections.

Once the test is complete, remove the loopback.

Select

Fault > Analysis > Loopback

...

Choose the DS3 port to test and click Select.

Select

Release

and

Loopback Type: Facility

and click

Apply

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-21

Stand-alone installation testing

through Step 8 for each DS3 cabled to the DSX-3.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Connect the RJ45 cable to the next jack on the RJ45 patch panel and repeat starting at

LNW66, LNW74, and LNW87 testing

LNW66 (10/100T), LNW74 (10/100), LNW87 (FE/GBE PL) TX Ethernet cabling testing

This procedure is to test the Ethernet 10/100 TX cabling from function groups D and G to the RJ45 patch panel for use with the LNW66, LNW74, and LNW87.

Note:

LNW74 TX Ethernet cabling test is not required. If the shelf is equipped with

VLF main packs (LNW141 or LNW84) and the LNW74 and LNW87 are provisioned to be equipped in both function slots (D1 and D2 or G1 and G2). In this configuration the backplane electrical ports cannot be used, only the SFP-based faceplate ports are used.

The following cables are required to test the Ethernet cabling.

Cable

Front CIT(RS-232) Cable

(C848748869)

LAN 10BaseT Straight-through

Cable

Length

8’-0"

As required to reach from front of Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend to the RJ45 patch panel

Quantity

Ethernet port assignment verification testing

Connect the Front CIT cable between the PC and the CIT/RS 232 port of the System

Controller and login to the shelf using the serial connection and the GUI options on

WaveStar

CIT.

Identify the function groups that contain LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 circuit packs with cabling for testing.

6-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Identify the RJ45 patch panel associated with the function groups identified above.

Connect the RJ45 cable from the first RJ45 on the patch panel to the Ethernet port on your

PC.

Watch for the link LED to light on the PC’s Ethernet card or wait for 30 seconds and then disconnect the RJ45 cable from the patch panel.

The Fault LED will start flashing on the LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 and the GUI will alarm the port under test and display a Critical Alarm inc.FE-LAN LOS in the Alarm List.

Verify that the port you are connected to matches the one listed in the aid of the FE-LAN

LOS alarm output.

Select

Configuration > Update System > Update All.

Click

Yes

to issue the command.

The flashing fault LED on the LNW66, LNW74, or LNW87 will clear.

4 until all connected jacks have been tested.

Step

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-23

Stand-alone installation testing

Ethernet port wiring verification testing

Note:

Continue with the following section only for LNW66 circuit packs. Testing is complete for LNW74 and LNW87 packs!

If not still connected serially from the last procedure then, connect the Front CIT cable between the PC and the CIT/RS-232 jack of System Controller and login to the shelf using the serial connection.

Select

Configuration > Data > Create Virtual Switch

Choose the LNW66 that is being tested.

Click

Select

Enter

Virtual Switch ID: 1

Under Ethernet (LAN) Ports, click

Select All

Click

Apply

Connect a RJ45 Ethernet cable from the LAN port on the LNW2 SYSCTL to the first position on the RJ45 Ethernet patch panel.

Connect a second RJ45 Ethernet cable from the PC Ethernet port to the second position on the RJ45 Ethernet patch panel.

Watch for the link LED to light on the PC’s Ethernet card or wait for 30 seconds.

Result:

Successful login to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

6-24

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Log out of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

At the RJ45 Ethernet patch panel disconnect the RJ45 Ethernet cable run to the PC

Ethernet port and connect it to the next position on the RJ45 Ethernet patch panel to be tested.

Ignore the flashing fault LED on the Ethernet circuit pack and any alarms on the shelf.

Watch for the link LED to light on the PC’s Ethernet card or wait for 30 seconds.

Result:

Successful login to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Log out of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Repeat this procedure starting at Step 13 for the remaining Ethernet connections on the

RJ45 patch panel connected to the LNW66 under test, then continue on to Step 19 .

Disconnect the PC from the RJ45 patch panel and the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

LAN port from the RJ45 patch panel.

If not still connected from the previous procedure. Connect the Front CIT cable between the PC and the CIT/RS 232 jack of System Controller and login to the shelf using the serial connection.

Select

Configuration > Update System... > Update All

Result:

The flashing fault LED on the Ethernet circuit pack will clear and any alarms on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf will also clear.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-25

Stand-alone installation testing

Select

Configuration > Data > Delete Virtual Switch

Choose the LNW66 circuit pack and click Select.

Select the VRTSW ID and click Apply.

Log out and disconnect the PC from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend serial port.

Repeat this procedure for every slot containing and LNW66.

Check off the appropriate box in the

detailed information and safety precautions, see Chapter 1, “Safety”

OC-3 low-speed testing

OC-3 low-speed LNW37 PTM testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit or growth slots containing LNW37 (OC-3 OLIU) circuit pack.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

Note:

When reference is made to optical fiber loopback connections to IN and OUT on the OLIU, make the connections at the LGX equipment in order to verify correct installation and labeling of the fibers.

6-26

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Note:

Equip all ports with PTMs provided. If all ports don’t have PTMs, but have associated fibers, then move PTMs to ports that are fibered.

LBOs are installed on the OLIU faceplate IN port.

Beginning from the Top (G) side of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, locate the first function unit slot position that contains an LNW37 circuit pack.

Insert a 15-dB LC-type LBO into the top IN connector (port 1) of the first PTM equipped.

See Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 1).

Connect the Port 1 IN connector to the Port 1 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-3

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable. See Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-3 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-3 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

Remove the optical fiber jumper from the OC-3 OLIU (at the LGX).

Result:

The FAULT LED should begin flashing on the OC-3 OLIU and only the MN and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

If not still connected from the previous procedure. Connect the Front CIT cable between the PC and the CIT/RS 232 port or OSI front LAN port of the System Controller and login to the shelf using the serial/LAN connection and the GUI options on WaveStar

CIT.

Use the GUI window to send the

upd-sys

command.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-27

Stand-alone installation testing

Click on the

Configuration > Update System > Update All

Result:

The flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the OC-3 OLIU.

There should be no alarm indications on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Remove PTM if necessary and the 15-dB LBO from OC-3 OLIU from (port 1) and plug it into the IN connector directly below it (port 2).

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 2).

Connect the Port 2 IN connector to the Port 2 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-3

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-3 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-3 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

to Step 9 for OLIU ports 3 and 4.

Repeat this entire procedure for each LNW37 PTM equipped in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Replace all protective dust covers on the LNW37 PTM connectors (OLIU and LGX), that were removed to perform this procedure.

Check off the appropriate box in the

6-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

OC-3 low-speed LNW45 or LNW55 PTM testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit or growth slots containing LNW45 (OC3) or LNW55 (with 12 OC3 PTMs) OLIU circuit packs.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

When connecting fiber loops between the IN and OUT ports on optical circuit packs, always connect to the IN port first and then the OUT port. This will prevent any optical radiation from being present at the fiber end. For more detailed information and safety precautions, see

See Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

Note:

The LNW55 circuit packs requires the LNW141 or LNW84 installed in the main slots to operate in a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

When reference is made to optical fiber loopback connections to IN and OUT on the OLIU, make the connections at the LGX equipment in order to verify correct installation and labeling of the fibers.

Note:

Equip all ports with PTMs provided. If all ports don’t have PTMs, but have associated fibers, then move PTMs to ports that are fibered.

LBOs are installed on the OLIU faceplate IN port.

Beginning from the Top (G) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, locate the first function unit slot position that contains an LNW45 or LNW55 circuit pack.

Insert a 15-dB LC-type LBO into the top IN connector (port 1) of the first PTM equipped.

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 1).

Connect the Port 1 IN connector to the Port 1 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-3

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable. See Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-29

Stand-alone installation testing

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-3 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-3 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

Remove the optical fiber jumper from the OC-3 OLIU (at the LGX).

Result:

The FAULT LED should begin flashing on the OC-3 OLIU and only the MN and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

CIT.

Use the GUI window to send the

upd-sys

command.

Click on the

Configuration > Update System > Update All

Result:

The flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the OC-3 OLIU.

There should be no alarm indications on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Remove PTM if necessary and the 15-dB LBO from OC-3 OLIU from (port 1) and plug it into the IN connector directly below it (port 2).

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 2).

Connect the Port 2 IN connector to the Port 2 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-3

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-3 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-3 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

6-30

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Step 10 for OLIU for the remaining ports on the LNW45 and the LNW55

circuit packs.

Repeat this entire procedure for each LNW45 and LNW55 equipped in the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf.

Replace all protective dust covers on the LNW45 and LNW55 PTM connectors (OLIU and LGX), that were removed to perform this procedure.

Check off the appropriate box in the

OC-12 low-speed testing

OC-12 low-speed LNW49 and LNW55 PTM testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit or growth slots containing OC-12 (LNW49 or LNW55) OLIU circuit packs...

CAUTION

Laser Safety

Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

Note:

The LNW55 circuit pack requires the LNW141 or LNW84 installed in the main slots to operate in a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

When reference is made to optical fiber loopback connections to IN and OUT on the OLIU, make the connections at the LGX equipment in order to verify correct installation and labeling of the fibers.

Note:

Equip all ports with PTMs provided. If all ports don’t have PTMs, but have associated fibers, then move PTMs to ports that are fibered. LBOs are installed on the

OLIU faceplate IN port.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-31

Stand-alone installation testing

Beginning from the top (G) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, locate the first function unit slot that contains an OC-12 OLIU circuit pack.

Insert a 15-dB LC-type LBO into the top IN connector (port 1) of the OC-12 OLIU. See

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 1).

Connect the Port 1 IN connector to the Port 1 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-12

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable. See

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-12 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and IN

NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-12 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

Remove the optical fiber jumper from the OC-12 OLIU (at the LGX).

Result:

The FAULT LED should begin flashing on the OC-12 OLIU and only the MN and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

CIT.

Use the

GUI

window to send the

upd-sys

command.

Click on the

Configuration > Update System > Update All.

Result:

The flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the OC-12 OLIU.

There should be no alarm indications on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

6-32

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Remove PTM if necessary and the 15-dB LBO from OC-12 OLIU from (port 1) and plug it into the IN connector directly below it (port 2).

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 2).

Connect the Port 2 IN connector to the Port 2 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-12

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-12 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-12 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

for all OLIU ports.

Repeat this entire procedure for each LNW49 or LNW55 PTM equipped in the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Replace all protective dust covers on the LNW49 or LNW55 PTM OC-12 OLIU connectors (OLIU and LGX), that were removed to perform this procedure.

Check off the appropriate box in the

detailed information and safety precautions, see Chapter 1, “Safety”

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-33

Stand-alone installation testing

OC-48 low-speed testing

OC-48 low-speed testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit or growth slots containing OC-48 (LNW31) OLIU circuit packs.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

Note:

When reference is made to optical fiber loopback connections to IN and OUT on the OLIU, make the connections at the LGX equipment in order to verify correct installation and labeling of the fibers.

LBOs are installed on the OLIU faceplate IN port.

Beginning from the top (G) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, locate the first function unit slot that contains an OC-48 OLIU circuit pack.

Insert a 15-dB LC-type LBO into the top IN connector of the OC-48 OLIU. See Appendix

C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs” .

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU.

Connect the Port 1 IN connector to the Port 1 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-48

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable. See

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-48 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-48 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

6-34

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Remove the optical fiber jumper from the OC-48 OLIU (at the LGX).

Result:

The FAULT LED should begin flashing on the OC-48 OLIU and only the MN and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

CIT.

Use the

GUI

window to send the

upd-sys

command.

Click on the

Configuration > Update System > Update All

Result:

The flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the OC-48 OLIU.

There should be no alarm indications on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Repeat this entire procedure for each low speed OC-48 circuit pack equipped in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Remove the 15-dB LBO from the OC-48 OLIU.

Replace all protective dust covers on the OC-48 OLIU connectors, that were removed to perform this procedure.

Repeat this entire procedure for each LNW31 OC-48 OLIU in the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Check off the appropriate box in the

detailed information and safety precautions, see Chapter 1, “Safety”

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-35

Stand-alone installation testing

OC-48 PTM equipped low-speed testing procedure

Perform the following steps for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf function unit or growth slots containing LNW62, LNW55, LNW402 (OC-48) OLIU circuit packs.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

Note:

The LNW62, LNW55 and LNW402 circuit packs require the LNW141 or

LNW84 be installed in the main slots to operate in a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Note:

When reference is made to optical fiber loopback connections to IN and OUT on the OLIU, make the connections at the LGX equipment in order to verify correct installation and labeling of the fibers.

Note:

Equip all ports with PTMs provided. If all ports don’t have PTMs, but have associated fibers, then move PTMs to ports that are fibered. LBOs are installed on the

OLIU faceplate IN port.

Beginning from the top (G) of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf, locate the first function unit slot that contains an OC-48 OLIU circuit pack.

Insert a 15-dB LC-type LBO into the top IN connector (port 1) of the OC-48 OLIU. See

Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 1).

Connect the Port 1 IN connector to the Port 1 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-48

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable. See

for proper fiber cleaning instructions.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-48 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-48 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

6-36

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Remove the optical fiber jumper from the OC-48 OLIU (at the LGX).

Result:

The FAULT LED should begin flashing on the OC-48 OLIU and only the MN and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

CIT.

Use the

GUI

window to send the

upd-sys

command.

Click on the

Configuration > Update System > Update All.

Result:

The flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the OC-48 OLIU.

There should be no alarm indications on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Remove PTM if necessary and the 15-dB LBO from OC-48 OLIU from (port 1) and plug it into the IN connector directly below it (port 2).

Connect the fibers labeled IN and OUT from the LGX to the OLIU (port 2).

Connect the Port 2 IN connector to the Port 2 OUT connector (at the LGX) of the OC-48

OLIU, using an optical fiber jumper cable.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OC-48 OLIU will begin flashing and the MN and NE

LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

After approximately 20 seconds the flashing FAULT LED should extinguish on the

OC-48 OLIU and the FAULT, MJ and NE LEDs should be lit on the SYSCTL circuit pack.

for OLIU ports 3 and 4.

Repeat this entire procedure for each LNW62, LNW55, LNW402 PTM equipped in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-37

Stand-alone installation testing

Replace all protective dust covers on the LNW62, LNW55, LNW402 PTM OC-48 OLIU connectors (OLIU and LGX), that were removed to perform this procedure.

Check off the appropriate box in the

LED test

Description

This test verifies proper operation of all LEDs on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend circuit packs. Operation of all the LEDs is necessary to assist in trouble isolation.

Note:

If there are any LED failures, determine if the problem is with the circuit pack or shelf and replace the faulty unit.

Steps

CIT.

Use the

GUI

window to send the

Test-LED

command.

Click on the

Fault > Test > LED.

4 Select Shelf (

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

Click

Select.

Click

Number of Iterations = 1

6-38

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Click OK.

Result:

All LEDs on the shelf should light for 10 seconds, then extinguish for 10 seconds, and then the proper LEDs will light to indicate the current status of the shelf.

Check off the appropriate box in the

The office alarm cable will be temporarily connected during this procedure. Table 6-1,

Office alarm test

Description

This test verifies proper operation and wiring of the office alarms in a network equipment building system (NEBS) environment.

Audible and visual reporting of critical, major, minor alarms will be verified.

Prerequisite

•

The following is a list of items to verify before beginning tests in this section.

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend Main OLIUs should be optically looped from the previous section. Verify that the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is clear of all alarms (only green LEDs are lighted) prior to and after completing this test.

“Office alarm connections” (p. 6-40)

lists the office alarms connections.

It is a requirement that alarms on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend do not affect and are not affected by other equipment via office alarm connections. During this test, the alarm state of other equipment connected to the same office alarms as the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend should be examined after creating or clearing every alarm.

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must always be worn while handling circuit packs.

This test should be performed on all shelves where office alarm reporting is required.

After completing the office alarm test, the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend office alarms should be disconnected from the office alarm system for the remainder of the test procedures. This will prevent the office alarms from being activated while performing the other tests in this section

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-39

Stand-alone installation testing

Table 6-1 Office alarm connections

Conn.

J13-J14

Pin#

Color

BL-W

W-BL

O-W

W-O

G-W

W-G

BR-W

W-BR

S-W

W-S

BL-R

R-BL

Designation Name

RYMJV1

RYMJV2

RYMJA1

RYMJA2

RYMNV1

RYMNV2

RYMNA1

RYMNA2

RYCRV1

RYCRV2

RYCRA1

RYCRA2

Minor Alarm Visible

Minor Alarm Visible Return

Minor Alarm Audible

Minor Alarm Audible Return

Major Alarm Visible

Major Alarm Visible Return

Major Alarm Audible

Major Alarm Audible Return

Critical Alarm Visible

Critical Alarm Visible Return

Critical Alarm Audible

Critical Alarm Audible Return

Steps

Connect the office alarm cable to J13 (ALM) on the backplane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf. If the shelf to be tested is part of a multiple shelf bay arrangement, the office alarm cable connects to shelf 1.

•

Verify that one of the function groups is equipped with any of the following circuit packs.

LNW7 (28DS1)

LNW8 (56DS1E1)

LNW16 (12DS3/EC1)

LNW18 (12TMUX)

LNW19B (48DS3/EC1)

LNW20 (48TMUXDS3EC1)

LNW39/LNW391 (DS1/DS3/16/3)

LNW111 (3 DS3)

LNW112 (16/3 DS1/DS3)

LNW801 (56 DS1E1)

6-40

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Establish a CIT session by following the procedure in Chapter 5, “Stand-alone node setup” ,

Reconnect the optical fiber jumper removed in Step 19 and reseat the pair of function

Use the

GUI

to enter the cross-connect command.

Click on

Configuration > Cross Connection > Create new cross-connection

Click

Next

Select

UPSR Ring Add/Drop

Select

STS1

Click

Next

Select the

Main Port STS1

Select the

Add/Drop port

on the function group where the LNW7, LNW8, LNW111,

LNW16, LNW18, LNW20, LNW19B, LNW112, LNW801 or LNW39/LNW391 circuit pack is installed.

This command creates a cross-connect to map all 28 DS1s of a 28DS1circuit pack or the first DS-3 of a 12DS3/EC1 for function unit D or G or all 16 DS1s of the

LNW39/LNW391 or LNW112 circuit pack in function unit A-1 and/or A-2 slot(s) to the first STS-1 of the Main OLIUs.

Click

Finish

to issue the command.

Use the

GUI

to view the cross-connects.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-41

Stand-alone installation testing

Click on

View > Cross-Connections

Select

Shelf

Click

Select

to issue the command.

Result:

The View Cross-Connection window will open displaying the cross-connect that was just entered.

Unseat one of the LNW7, LNW8, LNW111, LNW16, LNW18, LNW20, LNW19B,

LNW112, LNW801 or LNW39/LMW391 circuit packs from the function group being used.

Result:

Activated office alarms: MN visual, MN audible.

Note:

Alarms will not be activated until the alarm delay time has passed. The default time is 2 seconds.

Press the ACO pushbutton on the SYSCTL.

Result:

Activated office alarm: MN visual. The MN audible alarm clears.

Disconnect one of the optical fiber jumpers from the OUT port of the OLIU circuit pack in the M1 slot.

Result:

Activated office alarms: MJ visual, MJ audible.

Press the ACO pushbutton on the SYSCTL.

Result:

Activated office alarm: MJ visual.

The MJ audible alarm should clear.

Unseat the second circuit pack from the same function group pair as the circuit pack

removed in Step 17 .

Result:

Activated office alarms: CR visual, CR audible.

6-42

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Press the ACO pushbutton on the SYSCTL.

Result:

Activated office alarm: CR visual.

The CR audible alarm should clear.

units.

Result:

After a few minutes, all alarm indications should clear.

Disconnect the office alarm cable connected in Step 1 for the remainder of the test

procedures in this chapter.

Note:

Do NOT delete the cross-connect that was entered for this test.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Automatic protection switching and alarm test

Description

This section provides the procedures for verifying the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf automatic protection switching.

•

Note the following:

These tests do NOT simulate circuit pack failures.

The tests will verify proper alarm reporting and LED indications when circuit packs are removed.

All protected circuit packs will be tested.

A properly grounded wrist strap must always be worn while handling circuit packs.

This test is performed with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf optically looped back on itself (that is, with the IN of the OLIU M1 looped to the OUT of the OLIU

M1, and the IN of the OLIU M2 looped to the OUT of the OLIU M2).

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-43

Stand-alone installation testing

•

Prior to performing each test, the shelf under test must be clear of all alarms (that is, only green LEDs are lit).

CAUTION

ESD hazard

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap MUST be worn when handling circuit packs.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

CAUTION

Laser hazard

Main OLIU switching test

Use this procedure to test the following Main OLIU circuit packs:

•

LNW40, LNW140, LNW601, LNW38, LNW51, LNW302, LNW380, LNW382,

LNW41, LNW141 or LNW84

Establish a CIT session by following the procedure under

Repeat Step 6 through Step 8

CIT software” (p. 5-6)

Click on the

View > Cross-Connections

Select

Shelf

Click

Select

to issue the command.

Result:

The cross-connects entered previously should still be in place.

6-44

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Verify the active path, with the

View > Protection > Path Protection

command.

Result:

Each cross-connect that was entered will have an active path associated with it when selected.

Disconnect the optical fiber connected to the OUT port of the OLIU that is the active receiver.

CAUTION

Equipment damage

The LNW38, LNW40, LNW51, LNW140, LNW302, LNW380, LNW382, and

LNW601 OLIU circuit packs are equipped with optics that do not meet GR-78

R9-3 requirements on ESD susceptibility. Always use proper ESD procedures when handling these OLIU circuit packs to avoid equipment damage.

Result:

The MN and then NE alarm LED should light on the SYSCTL and the FAULT

LED should flash on the OLIU.

Verify the active path, with the

View > Protection > Path Protection

command.

Result:

The active path has now switched to the other path.

Reconnect the optical fiber to the OLIU.

Result:

After a short time, the MN and NE alarm LEDs on the SYSCTL and the

FAULT LED on the OLIU should extinguish.

to verify a switch back to the OLIU that was originally active.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-45

Stand-alone installation testing

Function units, switching test

Use this procedure to test any of the Function Slots occupied by a LNW7, LNW8,

LNW112, LNW16, LNW18, LNW19B, LNW20, LNW111, LNW801, LNW402,

LNW84, LNW140 or LNW39/LNW391 circuit pack.

This test is performed when the LNW7, LNW8, LNW112, LNW16, LNW18, LNW19B,

LNW20, LNW111, LNW84, LNW140 or LNW39/LNW391 circuit packs are in a 1+1 protection arrangement.

Locate the first function group equipped with LNW7, LNW8, LNW112, LNW16,

LNW18, LNW19B, LNW20, LNW111, LNW84, LNW140 or LNW39/LNW391 circuit packs.

Unseat the active circuit pack. The active circuit pack has an ACTIVE LED lit.

Result:

The ACTIVE LED on the other circuit pack in the function group lights.

The MN alarm and the NE LED on the SYSCTL should be lit.

Unseat the second circuit pack in the pair.

Result:

On the SYSCTL, the MN alarm extinguishes and the CR alarm lights.

Reseat the first circuit pack that was removed.

Result:

The ACTIVE LED on the reseated circuit pack lights.

The FAULT LED on the circuit pack will light for several seconds then extinguish.

On the SYSCTL, the CR alarm extinguishes and the MN alarm and the NE LED will be lit.

Reseat the second circuit pack.

Result:

The ACTIVE LED on the first circuit pack remains on.

The ACTIVE LED on the second circuit pack remains off.

The FAULT LED on the second circuit pack will light for several seconds then extinguish.

On the SYSCTL, the MN alarm extinguishes.

Repeat this procedure for each equipped function group.

6-46

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Swap circuit packs from another function group to test any unequipped function slots.

Check off the appropriate box in the

Manual switching tests

Description

This test will initiate switching commands from the WaveStar

GUI and verify proper switching and LED indications.

Main OLIU switch test

Note:

An STS-1 cross-connect should still exist from the previous tests.

Use the

GUI

to view the path protection command.

Verify the active path, with the

View > Protection > Path Protection

command.

Result:

Each cross-connect that was entered will have an active path associated with it when selected. The M1 OLIU is associated with Ring 1 and the M2 OLIU is associated with Ring 2.

Use the

GUI

to enter the manual path protection switch command.

Click on the

Fault > Protection Switch > Path Protection.

Double Click on a path; e.g.,

Path m1-1-1

Observe the

Active Path

displayed.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-47

Stand-alone installation testing

In the

Protection Switch Mode

pull down window select

Manual

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

Result:

The Response Window should display the command followed by a COMPLD indication.

Verify the active path, with the

View > Protection > Path Protection

command.

Result:

The path selected in the previous steps will have switched to the other path and a ABN condition will be displayed on the GUI.

Clear the manual switch.

Click on the

Fault > Protection Switch > Path Protection

Double Click on a path; e.g.,

Path m1-1a1-1-1

Observe the

Active Path

displayed.

In the

Protection Switch Mode

pull down window select

Clear

Check off the appropriate box in the

Function units/growth slots switching test

This test will initiate switching commands from the CIT and verify proper switching and

LED indications.

Note:

pair.

This procedure should be performed on each function unit and/or growth slot

6-48

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Use the e

GUI

to view the equipment state command.

Click on the

View > Equipment

Click on

CP fn-d-1 or fn-g-1

and click

Select.

Result:

The

View Equipment Window

should display information on the selected circuit pack indicating which function unit and/or growth slot circuit pack is active and which is standby.

Note which function unit or growth slot circuit pack is the active circuit pack from the previous result.

Use the

GUI

to enter equipment protection switch command.

Click on the

Fault > Protection Switch > 1+1 Protection

8 Switch Type

select

Manual

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

Double Click on a path; e.g.,

CP fn-d-1

fn-g-1

Click

Yes

Click on the

View > Equipment

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-49

Stand-alone installation testing

Click on

CP fn-a-1, fn-b-1, fn-d-1 or fn-g-1

Result:

The

View Equipment Window

should display information on the selected circuit pack indicating which function unit and/or growth slot circuit pack is active and which is standby.

This information should agree with the ACTIVE LEDS on the LNW7, LNW8,

LNW112, LNW16, LNW18, LNW19B, LNW20, LNW111, LNW84, LNW140,

LNW39, LNW801 or LNW391 circuit packs.

through Step 12 to verify a switch back to the original function unit or

growth slot circuit pack.

Repeat this procedure for each function unit and/or growth slot pair.

Check off the appropriate box in the

At the rear of the shelf [see Figure 6-1, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf backplane”

External timing verification

Description

This test should be performed if the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is going to be externally timed. The shelf timing cable must be installed and connected between the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf and the office timing source (BITS clock) and the timing source must be active.

Steps

Determine the frame format (SF or ESF) and line code (AMI or B8ZS) of the DS1 timing signals being generated by the timing source per the work order.

Use the

GUI

to set synchronization parameters.

6-50

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Click on the

Configuration > Timing/Sync.

Under the

System Timing tab

of the

Configure Timing/Sync window

Click on the

Timing Mode = External

Select The

Timing Input Ports

Tab.

Provision the Line Coding and format as determined in

Step 1

above.

Click

OK.

Click

Yes

to issue the command

Use the

GUI

View sync command.

Click on the

View > Timing/Sync

The

View Timing/Sync

window will display.

Result:

The tabs should display:

•

Correct line coding and frame format

Provisioned and active timing mode are both external

Both references are In Service.

Which of the two references is active

Note:

If a reference does not indicate is, that input is not receiving a proper timing reference. Verify:

– Cabling between the timing source and the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf

– Correct line coding

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-51

Stand-alone installation testing

– Correct frame format

(p. 6-52)

], disconnect the input timing cable from the connector associated with the active reference.

Result:

The MN LED lights solid on the SYSCTL and the FAULT LED flashes on the

Main OLIU circuit pack associated with that reference (SYNC1 is associated with M1 and SYNC2 is associated with M2).

Figure 6-1 Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf backplane

Click on the

View > Timing/Sync

The

View Timing/Sync

window will display.

Result:

The

Timing Input Ports

tab should display:

•

That the reference that is disconnected is Out of Service.

The other reference is active.

Reconnect the timing cable at the rear of the shelf.

Result:

The MN LED extinguishes on the SYSCTL and the FAULT LED on the OLIU stops flashing.

6-52

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Check off the appropriate box in the

Figure 6-2, “Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete functions” (p. 6-55)

Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry test

Description

Miscellaneous discrete telemetry access allows the maintenance center to control and monitor equipment co-located with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. See

. Perform this procedure for shelves that are cabled for miscellaneous discrete telemetry.

Steps

Determine which environmental inputs are to be monitored via the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend shelf.

Verify that the miscellaneous discrete cable is connected to the J20 MISC connector on the

shelf. See Figure 6-1, “Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf backplane” (p. 6-52)

See Table 6-2, “Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry connections” (p. 6-56)

to determine the wire color of the cable lead associated with the environmental input to be tested.

At the far end of the cable, short the associated environmental input lead to the red-slate

(R-S) Input Common lead.

Verify that the minor (MN) alarm lights on the SYSCTL.

Use the

GUI

to view the miscellaneous discretes command.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-53

Stand-alone installation testing

Click on the

Report > NE Alarm List...

In the

NE Alarm List

window set

Alarm Category:

Environment

Click

Result:

The NE Alarm List report window is opened and should display the correct environmental alarm has been activated.

Remove the short and verify that the minor (MN) alarm indication on the SYSCTL clears.

Repeat Step 3

through Step 10 for each environmental input being used.

Check off the appropriate box in the

6-54

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Figure 6-2 Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete functions

Remote Terminal

Input Common

Env. Input #1

Env. Input #2

Env. Alarm/Status

Inputs (Open Door,

High Temp, High

Water, Fire, etc.)

Env. Input #19

Generator,

Pump, etc.

Env. Output #1

Env. Output #2

Env. Output #3

Env. Output #4

Output Common

J20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-55

Stand-alone installation testing

Table 6-2 Miscellaneous (environmental) discrete telemetry connections

Conn.

Pin#

J11 1

Color

BL-W

W-BL

O-W

W-O

G-W

W-G

BR-W

W-BR

S-W

W-S

BL-R

R-BL

O-R

R-O

G-R

R-G

BR-R

R-BR

S-R

R-S

BL-BK

BK-BL

O-BK

BK-O

G-BK

Designation

TLMI1

TLMI2

TLMI3

TLMI4

TLMI5

TLMI6

TLMI7

TLMI8

TLMI9

TLMI10

TLMI11

TLMI12

TLMI13

TLMI14

TLMI15

TLMI16

TLMI17

TLMI18

TLMI19

TLMIC48VTRN

TLMO1

TLMO2

TLMO3

TLMO4

TLMOC

Name

Env. Input - #1

Env. Input - #2

Env. Input - #3

Env. Input - #4

Env. Input - #5

Env. Input - #6

Env. Input - #7

Env. Input - #8

Env. Input - #9

Env. Input - #10

Env. Input - #11

Env. Input - #12

Env. Input - #13

Env. Input - #14

Env. Input - #15

Env. Input - #16

Env. Input - #17

Env. Input - #18

Env. Input - #19

Input Common

Env. Output - #1

Env. Output - #2

Env. Output - #3

Env. Output - #4

Output Common

6-56

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Modem connection test

Description

This test will verify proper modem connection to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

This test should only be performed if a modem is required.

Steps

Verify the generic parameters of the modem are set to the following:

•

Modem Parameters

1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19,200 baud

Full duplex

8 data bits

No parity bits

1 start bit

1 stop bit

No flow control

Transparent data mode - ON

Direct operating mode - ON

Note:

Modems supporting a large set of options and error detection capabilities may require other options to be set before using the modem. See manufacturer’s manuals for instructions on setting modem parameters.

Verify that the modem cable is properly connected from the modem to J18 MODEM on the backplane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Use the

GUI

to set the modem command.

Click on the

Administration > Data Communications...

The

Data Communications

window opens select the

Serial Port

tab.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-57

Stand-alone installation testing

Choose

cit-2.

Select:

•

Echo mode Enabled

•

baudrate 9600

•

OSI Types TL1Test

Click

Apply

to issue the command.

Dial into the modem using an application such as HyperTerminal from a PC with a modem configured to similar parameters.

After a connection is established, press the enter key.

Result:

/* SYSTEM TID: LT-DMXTEND */

Enter the command:

act-user:

L T - D M X T E N D

L U C 0 1

:ctag::

D M X T N D 2 . 5 G

;

Result:

A message indicating that the command completed will be displayed along with the Alcatel-Lucent disclosure.

Enter the command:

canc-user:

L T - D M X T E N D

L U C 0 1

:ctag;

Result:

A message indicating that the command completed will be displayed.

Disconnect the HyperTerminal session.

Check off the appropriate box in the

6-58

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Stand-alone installation testing

Final operations

Description

The following procedure ensures that all test signals and cross-connects have been removed and the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is alarm free and ready for network connection procedures.

Steps

Use the

GUI

to View and Delete any cross-connects that were entered.

Verify that no alarm LEDs are lit and no FAULT LED is lit on any circuit pack.

If any alarm is present, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User

Operations Guide, 365-372-325.

If desired, reconnect the office alarm cable at this time.

Check off the appropriate box in the

“Installation checklist” to follow when

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

6-59

Stand-alone installation testing

6-60

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Part III: Network turn-up and testing

Overview

Introduction

Part III covers fiber connections between nodes in a ring and used to verify WDMX connectivity between Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend) nodes. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures. If problems are encountered, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User

Operations Guide, 365-372-325 for detailed troubleshooting procedures.

Part III also provides the recommended checklist

installing a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend) system. Use of the installation checklist is required to ensure a quality installation. All completed tasks should be checked off and those not completed should be duly noted as to the reason why. This checklist should be turned in as part of your job complete paperwork.

Contents

This part includes the following chapters:

Connecting adjacent network elements

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Tools, test equipment and accessories

This section lists the tools, test equipment and accessories needed to perform all the procedures in this installation manual.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

III-1

Network turn-up and testing

Listed below are the required tools, test equipment and accessories.

Qty.

Description

ESD Wrist Strap

R-4987C

DS1/E1 Error Rate Test Set

ITE-7113

DS3 Error Rate Test Set

ITE-7113

Comments

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge (ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

A DS1/E1 error rate test set is required for testing of

DS1/E1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

A DS3 error rate test set is required for testing of DS3 cabling. A T-BERD 209 or equivalent is recommended.

1 Optical Test Set (Optional) A Optical test set is required for testing of low speed optics OC3/12/48. An Omniber 718 or equivalent is recommended.

2 or 3 LC-type Optical Fiber

Jumper ITE-7169

(108918269)

Two optical fiber jumpers with LC type connectors are required to optically loop the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

1 15-dB LC-type LBO ITE-

7196 (108279480)

Noyes OFS 300-200X

Optical Fiber Scope

ITE-7129

LBOs are only required when optically looping the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves containing optical circuit packs in any of the function unit slots; a single 15-dB LBO is required for testing of the individual ports

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the optical fiber scope may not be needed

For use with the Noyes OFS 300-200X Optical Fiber

Scope

2.5mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D1

1.25mm Universal adapter cap ITE-7129 D2

Noyes VFS-1 ITE-7187

Video Fiber Scope

Individual presaturated alcohol wipes ITE-7136

This equipment may not be necessary at all locations.

It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the video scope may not be needed

99% pure isopropyl alcohol

III-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Network turn-up and testing

Qty.

Description Comments

1 CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette ITE-7137

Type A Reel

1 CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette Replacement Reel

ITE-7137 D1

Type A Reel

Luminex Stick port cleaners ITE-7134 & ITE-

7135

Luminex Cloth R-6033

1.25 mm and 2.5 mm sizes

5.5” x 5.5”

PC and cable requirements for WaveStar

CIT

This section lists the required equipment needed to run the WaveStar

CIT software with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Quantity

Description

Personal Computer

(PC)

RS-232 Interface

Cable

RJ45 to RJ45 Crossover Cable

Comments

See PC minimum requirements .

8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable (Comcode 848748869)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

III-3

Network turn-up and testing

Installation checklist

Completed

Yes No Section and chapter Procedure

Part III: “Network turn-up and testing”

Chapter 7, “Connecting adjacent network elements”

“Fiber installation” (p. 7-3)

“Optical transmission test (OC-192, OC-48,

OC-12, OC-3)” (p. 7-10)

Required

Yes

“Automatic protection switching test” (p. 7-12)

“Manual switching tests” (p. 7-13)

“Final operations” (p. 7-15)

“Turn-up and test the LNW785 8-channel

OMD” (p. 8-4)

Yes

Chapter 8, “WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures”

“Turn up and test the LNW705 muxponder”

(p. 8-6)

Notes:

1. Only required if equipped.

“Removing provisioning and equipage from the

LNW785” (p. 8-16)

III-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7 Connecting adjacent network elements

Overview

Purpose

This procedure is used to make fiber connections between nodes in a ring. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures. If problems are encountered, see Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide, 365-372-325 for detailed troubleshooting procedures.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics: Tools, Test Equipment and

Accessories:

Fiber installation

Optical transmission test (OC-192, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3)

Automatic protection switching test

Manual switching tests

Final operations

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-1

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

Listed below are the tools, test equipment and accessories necessary to perform the procedures in this section.

Quantity Description

Screwdriver(s)

ESD Wrist Strap

Multimeter (Optional)

DS1/E1 Error Rate Test Set

DS3 Error Rate Test Set

Comments

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge

(ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

The voltmeter must be capable of measuring

DC voltage in the 40 to 60 volt range. The use of the voltmeter is optional since the shelf will alarm or shut down if the proper voltage is not supplied.

A DS1/E1 error rate test set is required for testing of DS1/E1 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

A DS3 error rate test set is required for testing of DS3 cabling. A T-BERD 2209 or equivalent is recommended.

Personal Computer (PC)

CIT Interface Cable 8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable

(Comcode 848748869).

1 Optical Power Meter

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

Safety instructions

Note:

All precautions should be observed when handling fiber.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

CAUTION

The operational tests in this section are run only in an out-of-service mode of operation. Office alarms will normally be connected only during the office alarm test to prevent constant alarms throughout this section.

Note:

If the transmit pluggable tranmission module is failed and transmitting an invalid signal during installation, no alarms are reported since the receive port at the opposite end of the span has not transitioned from AUTO to IS, even though the measured receive power is within acceptable levels.

The failed transmit pluggable transmission module appears as an LOS to the receive pluggable transmission module causing the port state to remain AUTO.

If the receive pluggable transmission module is receiving a signal within acceptable levels but does not transition from AUTO to IS, replace the transmit pluggable transmission module at the opposite end of the span.

Fiber installation

Description

This section is used to verify proper fiber connections between Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) nodes.

Prerequisite

The following is a list of items to verify before beginning tests in this section.

•

Two people are required to perform the end-to-end turn up in this section (one at each adjacent node).

WaveStar

CIT is still connected to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend and the

GUI is running.

The office alarm cable will remain disconnected during this procedure.

•

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-3

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

•

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must always be worn while handling circuit packs.

CAUTION

ESD hazard

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap MUST be worn when handling circuit packs.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

Steps

The following procedures are performed at each end of the optical span being tested.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that the office alarm cable to J13 (ALM) on the backplane of the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend shelf is disconnected. If the shelf to be tested is part of a multiple shelf bay arrangement, the office alarm cable connects to shelf 1.

................................................................................................................................................

Enter the shelf TID per the customer order or use LT-DMXTEND-1 and LT-DMXTEND-

2 as defaults.

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

Graphical User Interface (GUI)

to enable the AGNE at LT-DMXTEND-1 only.

................................................................................................................................................

Click on

Administration > Set NE...

................................................................................................................................................

In the

Set NE window

click on:

•

Remote NE Status: Enabled

•

AGNE: Enabled

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

to enable the Remote NE Status at all nodes.

................................................................................................................................................

In the

GUI

screen for each NE click on

Administration > Set NE...

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

In the

Set NE window

click on:

•

Remote NE Status: Enabled

................................................................................................................................................

Dress optical cables out of the shelf to the left side of the shelf.

Note:

Leave enough slack in the fibers to allow them to be moved higher or lower to allow the circuit packs in slots A1/B1 and A2/B2 to be inserted or removed.

................................................................................................................................................

Route the optical jumpers from the left side of the shelf.

................................................................................................................................................

Establish communications with the technician at the other end of the optical span.

................................................................................................................................................

At both ends of the optical span, remove protective covers from receive and transmit optical jumper cables and clean LC connectors.

CAUTION

Equipment damage

The LNW38, LNW40, LNW51, LNW140, LNW302, LNW380, LNW382, and

LNW601 OLIU circuit packs are equipped with optics that do not meet GR-78

R9-3 requirements on ESD susceptibility. Always use proper ESD procedures when handling these OLIU circuit packs to avoid equipment damage.

Note:

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend OLIUs require single-mode lightguide cable. Single-mode optical fibers connecting this shelf with the far-end shelf should not be connected to the OLIU until at least 45 seconds after an optical loopback is removed. It may take from 15 seconds to 3.5 minutes for the FAULT LEDs to stop flashing after the cables are connected, depending on the setting of the OC-3/OC-

12/OC-48/OC-192 signal degrade threshold.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-5

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

At both ends of the optical span, ensure that only the dual LC adapter is installed on the

OLIU (no LBO).

Note:

For Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192 ring configurations, optical fibers extend in two different directions to make up the ring. At each shelf (node) in the ring, the M1 OLIU will connect to the M2 OLIU in one adjacent node, and the M2 OLIU will connect to the M1 OLIU in the other adjacent node. Likewise, when the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend is interfacing with other equipment at low-speeds (OC-3, OC-12 or OC-48) using 0x1 protection, the Function

Group slot (D, or G) 1 will connect to Main 2 on whatever shelf the Alcatel-Lucent

1665 DMXtend is being connected to. The Function Group slot (D, or G) 2 will connect to Main 1.

................................................................................................................................................

At each end of the optical span, connect the optical fiber transmit cables to the OLIU OUT connectors.

................................................................................................................................................

At each end of the optical span, measure the optical power of the optical fiber receive cables using an optical power meter.

................................................................................................................................................

Determine the LBO value required based on the received optical power measurement. See the following table and attenuate appropriately.

Table 7-1 Attenuation table

Optics

OC-3 (high speed)

Low-speed optics (OC-48)

Circuit pack

LNW40

LNW140

LNW601

LNW302

LNW31 (OC-48)

Received power

(dBM)

-8.0 to -28.0

0.0 to -15.0

TBD

0.0 to -18.0

LBO

(dB)

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

Optics Circuit pack

Received power

(dBM)

LBO

(dB)

OC-12 (high speed)

LNW38 -8.0 to -28.0

LNW51

LNW380

-8.0 to -30.5

-8.0 to -29.0

OC-48 PTM

(pluggable transmission module) optics

OC-192 VLF high speed PTM

(pluggable transmission module) optics

LNW382

LNW141, LR-2 Optics

TBD

LNW41/55/62 LR-1 Optics -9.0 to -27.0

LNW41/55/62 LR-2 Optics -9.0 to -28.0

LNW41/55/62 SR-1 Optics -3.0 to -18.0

+4.0 to 0.0

0.0 to -7.0

LNW141, IR-2 Optics

-7.0 to -24.0

+2.0 to -1.0

-1.0 to -14

-1.0 to -11.0

PTM (pluggable transmission module)

LNW141, SR-1 Optics

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 SR-1 -8.0 to -23.0

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 IR-1 -8.0 to -28.0

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 LR-1 0.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10

-10 to -34.0

-8.0 to -28.0

LNW49/55 OC-12

SR-1

LNW49/55 OC-12

IR-1

LNW49/55 OC-12 LR-1

-8.0 to -28.0

+2.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -15

-15 to -28.0

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-7

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Select the proper LBO based on the value required and the comcode as listed below.

Code

ABLCS-05.0

ABLCS-10.0

ABLCS-15.0

ABLCS-20.0

Comcode

108279381

108279431

108279480

108279530

Loss (dB)

................................................................................................................................................

Clean LC LBOs and install LBO assemblies in the OLIU IN connector.

................................................................................................................................................

At the far end, connect the input optical fiber to the proper OLIU IN connector.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OLIU extinguishes.

................................................................................................................................................

At the near end, connect the input optical fiber to the proper OLIU IN connector.

Result:

The FAULT LED on the OLIU extinguishes.

................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the fiber cable from the OUT connector on the OLIU at one end of the span.

At the other end, verify that the associated FAULT LED is flashing, indicating a loss of signal. Reconnect the fiber and repeat the process for the other direction of transmission.

................................................................................................................................................

In order to enable communications with the adjacent Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend nodes,

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

to turn off the DCCs.

Configuration > DCC Terminations

................................................................................................................................................

The

Configure DCC Terminations

window will be displayed.

................................................................................................................................................

For

Port AID:

select dcc-m1-1

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

For

OSI Over DCC

select

enabled

................................................................................................................................................

For

LAPD Roll:

select

user-side

................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply to send the command.

................................................................................................................................................

For

Port AID:

select dcc-m2-1.

................................................................................................................................................

For

OSI Over DCC

select

enabled

................................................................................................................................................

For

LAPD Roll:

select

Network-side

................................................................................................................................................

Click Apply to send the command.

................................................................................................................................................

Set the timing to Free Running at LT-DMXTEND-1 and Line LT-DMXTEND-2.

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

to change the system timing.

Configuration > Timing Sync

................................................................................................................................................

The

Configure Timing/Sync

window will be displayed.

................................................................................................................................................

Under the

System Timing

tab set the

Timing Mode:

Free Running

at LT-DMXTEND-1 and to

Line

at LT-DMXTEND-2.

................................................................................................................................................

Click

to issue the command.

................................................................................................................................................

In order to verify proper communications with the adjacent Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend nodes, execute the following command from the

GUI

Administration > OSI-Neighbor-Map

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-9

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

Result:

The TIDs and NSAPs of adjacent nodes will be displayed along with the

OLIU and port they are connected to.

................................................................................................................................................

In order to verify proper network DCC communications, execute the following command from the

GUI

Administration > OSI-Routing-Map

Result:

The TIDs and NSAPs of all the nodes in the TARP area will be displayed.

................................................................................................................................................

Perform steps in this procedure on all adjacent nodes in the ring.

................................................................................................................................................

After all connections and tests have been made, verify optical fiber cables are placed in the fiber slots on the left side of the shelf and properly routed in bay framework.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Optical transmission test (OC-192, OC-48, OC-12, OC-3)

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

command:

Performance > Initialize PM Registers.

................................................................................................................................................

Click on the

Both

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Yes

to execution command.

................................................................................................................................................

Wait 15 minutes.

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

At the test location, enter the following GUI command:

Performance > View PM/Statistics Reports > OCn Line

................................................................................................................................................

Double-click

CP main-1

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Port 1 (OC3)

................................................................................................................................................

For

Time Period

select

1 Day.

................................................................................................................................................

For

Monitored Date, select

Current Date.

................................................................................................................................................

For

Monitor Level

Select

0-UP.

................................................................................................................................................

Under the

Near End

tab click on the

Select All

button.

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Apply.

Result:

The

OCn Line PM Report

window indicates no transmission errors.

................................................................................................................................................

Step 12

for all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves at the test location.

................................................................................................................................................

Step 12

for each node in the ring.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-11

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

Automatic protection switching test

Description

This section provides the procedures for verifying the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf automatic and manual protection switching.

•

Note the following:

These tests do NOT simulate circuit pack failures.

A properly grounded wrist strap must always be worn while handling circuit packs.

Prior to performing each test, the shelf under test must be clear of all alarms (that is, only green LEDs are lighted).

Main OLIU switch test

................................................................................................................................................

In order to perform path switching, enter an STS-1 add/drop cross-connection between an equipped Function Unit and the Main OLIU. Select

Configuration > Cross-

Connections...

and use the

Cross-Connection Wizard

to enter an add/drop crossconnection.

................................................................................................................................................

Select

View > Protection...

................................................................................................................................................

Under Path Protection choose

Path m1-1-1

and click

Select

................................................................................................................................................

Note the Active Path (m1 or m2).

................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect the optical fiber connected to the IN port on the active path OLIU.

Result:

The MN and then MJ alarm LED should light on the SYSCTL and the FAULT

LED should flash on the OLIU.

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Refresh

in the

View Protection

window.

................................................................................................................................................

Verify the Active Path has changed (from m1 to m2 or m2 to m1).

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect the optical fiber to the OLIU.

Result:

After a short time, the MJ alarm LED on the SYSCTL and the FAULT LED on the OLIU should extinguish.

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 2 through

Step 8

to verify a switch back to the OLIU that was originally active.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Manual switching tests

Description

This test will initiate switching commands from the CIT and verify proper switching and

LED indications.

Note:

An STS-1 cross-connect is required in order to perform manual switching.

Manual switching test procedure

................................................................................................................................................

Enter an STS-1 add/drop cross-connection between an equipped Function Unit and the

Main OLIU. Select

Configuration > Cross-Connections...

and use the

Cross-Connection

Wizard

to enter an add/drop cross-connection.

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Fault > Protection Switch...

................................................................................................................................................

Under

Path Protection

choose

Path m1-1-1

and click

Select

................................................................................................................................................

Note the Active Path (m1 or m2).

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-13

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Choose

Switch Type: Manual

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Apply

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that the Active Path: has changed (m1 to m2 or m2 to m1).

................................................................................................................................................

through Step 7 to verify a switch back to the original ring.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Function units/growth slots switching test

This test will initiate switching commands from the CIT and verify proper switching and

LED indications.

Note:

This procedure should be performed on each function unit equipped with protected electrical TDM circuit packs.

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Fault > Protection Switch...

................................................................................................................................................

Click on

1+1 Equip fn-x

(x is a, b, d or g corresponding to the function group equipped).

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Select

................................................................................................................................................

Note which function unit or growth slot circuit pack is the active circuit pack.

................................................................................................................................................

In the

Switch Type:

pull-down, select

Manual (Normal)

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Apply

Result:

The pack that was active should now be the standby pack and the pack that was standby is now active. Transmission should take a momentary hit as it is switched to the other pack. This information should agree with the ACTIVE LEDs on the circuit packs.

................................................................................................................................................

to verify a switch back to the original function unit circuit pack, with the same results as the previous step.

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat this procedure for each function unit pair.

................................................................................................................................................

Swap circuit packs from another function group to test any unequipped function slots.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Final operations

Description

The following procedure ensures that all test signals and cross-connects have been removed and the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf is alarm free and ready for network connection procedures.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

command:

View > Cross-Connections

................................................................................................................................................

Click the

Shelf (

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-15

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Select

to send the command.

Result:

The

View Cross-Connections

Window should display the cross-connect entered earlier.

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

command

Configuration > Cross-Connections

................................................................................................................................................

In the

Cross-Connection Wizard

click on the

Delete (legs) of an existing crossconnect

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Next

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Shelf (

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend

)

................................................................................................................................................

Double click

CP main-1

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Port 1 (OCn)

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight the Cross-Connect shown.

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Next

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Next

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Finish

................................................................................................................................................

Select

Yes

to the execution warning message.

................................................................................................................................................

through Step 14 to verify no further cross-connects exist.

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Verify that no alarm LEDs are lit and no FAULT LED is lit on any circuit pack.

If any alarm is present, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User

Operations Guide, 365-372-325.

Clear PM registers

The following steps will clear all the performance monitoring registers:

................................................................................................................................................

Use the

GUI

command.

Performance > Initialize PM Registers > 15-Min

................................................................................................................................................

Click

Yes

to execution command.

................................................................................................................................................

Reconnect the office alarm cable at this time.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Turn-up and test the LNW785 8-channel OMD

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

7-17

Connecting adjacent network elements

........................................................................................................................................................................

7-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8 WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

Overview

Purpose

This chapter is used to verify WDMX connectivity between Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data

Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) nodes. The chapter includes the

LNW785 8 channel Optical Multiplexer Demultiplexer (OMD) circuit pack. It is not intended to replace acceptance test procedures.

The testing performed in this procedure uses an OC-48 test set. If the OC48 PTM and test sets are unavailable, other rates or signals can be substituted, i.e OC-3/-12 or GigE. If additional provisioning procedures are desired, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer

Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide, 365-372-325. For detailed troubleshooting procedures, see Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) Maintenance and Trouble Clearing Guide, 365-372-326.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics

Turn up and test the LNW705 muxponder

Integrating the LNW705 into the LNW785

Removing provisioning and equipage from the LNW705 and LNW785

Connecting the ring (Mains) to the WDMX

Removing provisioning and equipage from the LNW785

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-1

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

How to use this chapter

All of the sections in this chapter are stand alone procedures and are not intended to be followed in any sequence. Locate the procedure in this chapter and follow the procedure based on the requirements of the turn-up. When one procedure relies on steps from another procedure or continues on with the next procedure, the link is provided in the procedure.

Tools, test equipment and accessories

Listed below are the tools, test equipment and accessories necessary to perform the procedures in this section.

Quantity

Description

ESD Wrist Strap

OC-48 Test Set

Comments

A wrist strap must be worn when handling circuit packs. Use the electrostatic discharge

(ESD) jack provided on the shelf.

An OC-48 test set is required for testing of optical circuit packs. An Agilent OmniBER 718 or equivalent is recommended.

Personal Computer (PC)

CIT Interface Cable 8-ft. long RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub serial cable

(Comcode 848748869).

1 Optical Power Meter

Prerequisite

•

The following is a list of items to verify before beginning tests in this section.

Two or more people are required to perform the end-to-end turn up in this section (one at each adjacent node).

The office alarm cable will remain disconnected during this procedure.

Safety instructions

Note:

All precautions should be observed when handling fiber.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

CAUTION

ESD hazard

A properly grounded ESD wrist strap MUST be worn when handling circuit packs.

WARNING

Laser hazard

Unterminated optical connectors may emit laser radiation. Do not view beam with optical instruments.

CAUTION

Laser Safety

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-3

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn-up and test the LNW785 8-channel OMD

Description

This procedure provides a method to provision and test an optical span using the 8-channel

OMD LNW785 circuit pack. The procedure requires a LNW785 at both ends of the span and that there is least one OC-192/10Gbps source at each end of the span. The source OC-

192 could be a LNW141 or an OC-192/10Gbps from a alien shelf but the source MUST be compatible with the wavelengths on the LNW785. The LNW141 must be equipped with

X10G52C5, X10G53C5, X10G54C5, or X10G55C5. If using an alien 10Gbps source, see

Table 8-3, “Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19) for the wavelengths specifications.

................................................................................................................................................

Determine and document the test signal frequency.

................................................................................................................................................

Install the LNW785 into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf by opening both faceplate latches and seating in the slot while closing the latches.

Note:

The LNW785 can be installed in any Function/Growth slot. When the shelf is to be configured as an add/drop, it is recommended that the Growth slots are not used because the passthrough fibers would have to route over the SYSCTL. If the Main slots are not equipped with Very Large Fabric LNW141 or LNW84 OLIU circuit packs, then the circuit packs in a Function/Growth slot must be the same type.

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

................................................................................................................................................

Create OCH Cross-connections

Select Configuration > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Select the Create a new OCH cross-connection radio button in the OCH Cross-

Connection Wizard. Click Next.

Click the 2-way Add/Drop radio button from the cross-connection list. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select, then select REMAID and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the Port to highlight it then click Select.

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select for the Add/Drop port, expand the circuit pack (OMD5/8) and click on the

Port and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the Port to highlight it then click Select.

Note:

The port is determined by the test signal wavelength documented in

Step

................................................................................................................................................

Click Next, then Finish and complete the cross-connection by clicking on Yes in the confirmation window.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect fibers from Test port to selected channel on LNW785, while observing optical power requirements and cleaning procedures.

................................................................................................................................................

Chapter 8, “WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures”

at the remote Network Element.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the Transmit fibers on the LNW785 at each end, following proper fiber cleaning procedures.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the Receive fibers on the LNW785 at each end, while observing optical power requirements and cleaning procedures.

Result:

Span is in-service

................................................................................................................................................

If adding a span in the other direction using the LNW785 repeat

Step 2

through Step 12

, otherwise continue.

................................................................................................................................................

Perform end-to-end testing. Follow the end to end testing procedures determined by the input test signal. If the test signal is the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend as part of a ring, proceed to

and locate the appropriate procedure

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Table 8-3, “Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19)

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-5

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Turn up and test the LNW705 muxponder

Description

The following procedure is a simple method of testing end to end continuity of the

LNW705 Muxponder circuit. The test requires that a LNW705 is installed in two nodes and that there is fiber continuity between the two LNW705s. The fiber path could be a direct fiber connection, through a passive optics device, a LNW785 or through another

DWDM system. In any case, the LNW705 link must be established. Once the end-to-end link has been established, an OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 test set and PTMs will be used to perform the end to end test.

Steps

This procedure provides the steps needed to equip and test an Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend with one LNW705 in G2. The steps include installing and equipping the

LNW705 with the 10G and low speed PTMs, along with all the necessary provisioning.

................................................................................................................................................

Install the LNW705 into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf by opening both faceplate latches and seating in the slot while closing the latches.

Note:

The LNW705 can only be installed in Growth 2 slot.

................................................................................................................................................

Install the appropriate 10G PTM

into

Port 9.

................................................................................................................................................

Install an OC-3/OC-12/OC-48 PTM in Port 1 of the LNW705 [see Appendix B ,

“PTM modules” (p. B-2)

Note:

The PTMs at both ends of the circuit must be the same rate.

For purposes of this document, the examples in the procedures below are equipped with an OC-48 PTM. Other signals listed in

Appendix B

, “PTM modules” (p. B-2)

could be substituted, however use the guidelines set in “XM10G/8 PTM port guidelines” (p. 8-14)

for the port restrictions.

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Provision the PTM/OTU-2

Select Configuration > Equipment from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to XM10G/8 circuit pack to expand the list.

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight the PTM sc9 and click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Frequency in the Expected Frequency and click Apply.

Note:

The frequency is determined by the PTM inserted in Port 9. See the LNW705 column in

Table 8-3, “Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19) for acceptable values.

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight the Port 1 and click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Set the Signal type to match the PTM type, using the pull down window (for example if the PTM is a OC48SR1-I1

, set the Signal Type to OC48) and click

Apply

................................................................................................................................................

Perform a single node self test by connecting an OC-48 test set to Port 1, while observing the proper optical power levels and cleaning procedures.

Insert a 15 dB LBO into the input of Port 9 and connect a fiber from the output of Port 9 to the input of Port 9.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect an OC-48 test set to the PTM in port 1 while observing the proper optical power levels listed in

Table 8-4, “Attenuation Table” (p. 8-19) .

................................................................................................................................................

Condition the test set to transmit and receive a STS-48 PRBS test signal.

Result:

Observe error-Free Transmission.

................................................................................................................................................

Inject a single error from the test set.

Result:

Test set reports the error.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-7

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

to Step 14 at the other node.

................................................................................................................................................

Remove fiber and LBOs from Port 9 of both LNW705s.

................................................................................................................................................

Establish the end to end link on the 10G PTM while observing the proper optical levels

listed in Table 8-4, “Attenuation Table” (p. 8-19)

. If connecting through the LNW785 go to

“Integrating the LNW705 into the LNW785” (p. 8-9)

, otherwise continue.

................................................................................................................................................

Locate and connect the span fibers to the LNW705 while observing the proper optical levels listed in

Table 8-4, “Attenuation Table” (p. 8-19) .

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 18

at the LNW705 at the other node on the opposite end of the span.

................................................................................................................................................

Observe test set and verify error-free transmission. If only one test set is available, connect a fiber from the In port to the Out port of the PTM in port 1 at one end. Use the

information listed in Table 8-4, “Attenuation Table” (p. 8-19)

to determine the proper

LBO/Attenuator.

Note:

Test duration may be determined by engineering specification or by the end customer.

................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect test set(s) and fiber jumper from ports.

................................................................................................................................................

Remove PTM from LNW705 if necessary and clear any associated alarms by selecting

Configuration > Update System> Update Inventory.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in Table I-2, Installation checklist .

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Integrating the LNW705 into the LNW785

Description

The output of the LNW705 OTU-2 signal is compatible with the input channels of the

LNW785. The procedure below assumes that

Step 1

through Step 16 in

“Check off the appropriate box in the “Installation checklist” (p. III-4).” (p. 8-5)

have been completed.

Steps

................................................................................................................................................

Install the LNW785 into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf by opening both faceplate latches and seating in the slot while closing the latches.

Note:

The LNW785 can be installed in any Function/Growth slot. When the shelf is to be configured as an add/drop, it is recommended that the Growth slots are not used because the passthrough fibers would have to route over the SYSCTL. If the Main slots are not equipped with VLF mains (LNW59, LNW82, LNW504), then the circuit packs in a Function/Growth slot must be the same type.

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

................................................................................................................................................

Create OCH Cross-connections

Select Configuration > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Select the Create a new OCH cross-connection radio button in the OCH Cross-

Connection Wizard. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click the 2-way Add/Drop radio button from the cross-connection list. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select and expand the circuit pack list by clicking the “+” next to XM10G/8, highlight Port 9 OTU-2 and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the AID to highlight it then click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select for the Add/Drop port, expand the circuit pack (OMD5/8) and click on the

Port (the port must match XM10G/8 OTU-2 port) and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the AID to highlight it then click Select.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-9

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click Next, then Finish and complete the cross-connection by clicking on Yes in the confirmation window.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect fibers from the LNW705 Port 9 to the corresponding channel on the LNW785 while observing proper optical power levels and cleaning procedures.

................................................................................................................................................

information listed in Table 8-4, “Attenuation Table” (p. 8-19)

though Step 9

at the remote node.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the Transmit fibers to the OTS port on the LNW785 at each end of the span, following proper fiber cleaning procedures.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the Receive fibers, while observing optical power requirements and cleaning procedures

................................................................................................................................................

Observe test set and verify error-free transmission. If only one test set is available, connect a fiber from the In port to the Out port of the PTM in port 1 at one end. Use the

to determine the proper

LBO/Attenuator.

Note:

Test duration may be determined by engineering specification or by the end customer.

................................................................................................................................................

Disconnect test set(s) and fiber jumper from ports.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in Table I-2, Installation checklist .

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Removing provisioning and equipage from the LNW705 and

LNW785

Description

This section provides procedures on how to properly remove provisioning from the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf once testing is completed and the equipment/ports are no longer needed. Locate the procedure below to remove the equipment and return the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend back to the original status.

Deleting the OCH cross-connection

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

................................................................................................................................................

Retrieve OCH Cross-connections.

Select View > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to OMD5/8 circuit pack to expand the list.

Record the list of ports to be used when deleting OCH cross-connections. If there are more than one OMD5/8 circuit packs installed, click on the “+” next to the others to document the list of OCH cross-connection for the remaining circuit packs.

................................................................................................................................................

Delete OCH Cross-connections

Select Configuration > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Select the Delete an existing OCH cross-connection radio button in the OCH Cross-

Connection Wizard. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to OMD5/8 circuit pack to expand the list

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight one of the OCH cross-connections from the list recorded in Step 3 and click

Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight All Legs and click Next, Finish, then Yes.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-11

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 5

through

Step 8 for all remaining OCH cross-connections recorded in Step 3 .

................................................................................................................................................

End the OCH cross-connection Wizard session by clicking Close.

Delete LNW785 circuit pack

................................................................................................................................................

Remove the LNW785 circuit pack from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

................................................................................................................................................

Update the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend inventory.

Select Configuration > Update System > Update Inventory

................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to acknowledge the request.

Delete low-speed PTM

................................................................................................................................................

Remove Low Speed PTM from LNW705 by reversing the procedure in

“Install pluggable modules” (p. B-8)

Appendix B ,

................................................................................................................................................

If removing the LNW705 from the shelf proceed to

Delete LNW705 circuit pack (p. 8-13) ,

otherwise provision the port back to Signal Type Not Available.

STNA Select Configuration > Equipment

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to the XM10G/8 that had the PTM installed to expand the list.

................................................................................................................................................

Locate the port where the PTM was installed and highlight the port and click Select.

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

After the screen on the right appears, provision the Signal Type to STNA by using the pull down arrow and select STNA then Apply then Close.

Delete LNW705 circuit pack

................................................................................................................................................

Remove the LNW705 circuit pack from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

................................................................................................................................................

Update the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend inventory

Select Configuration > Update System > Update Inventory

................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to acknowledge the request.

Table 8-1 Channel/port assignments

Apparatus

Code

X10G52C5

X10G53C5

X10G54C5

X10G55C5

X10G56C5

X10G57C5

X10G58C5

X10G59C5

Channel

LNW705

9520

9530

9540

9550

9560

9570

9580

9590

LNW785

OCH

9520

9530

9540

9550

9560

9570

9580

9590

Frequency

195200 GHz

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-13

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

LNW705 XM10G/8 port guidelines

The following table list the PTM restrictions and guidelines.

Table 8-2 XM10G/8 PTM port guidelines

Port

Number

Yes

Signal Type

OC-3/STM1 OC-12/STM4 OC-48/STM16 1Gbe 1GFC 2GFC

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Connecting the ring (Mains) to the WDMX

Description

This section provides guidance on how to integrate an OC-48/OC-192 into the WDMX.

Depending on the Main circuit packs and the port rate, the ring can be integrated through the LNW785. Only the LNW141 can be integrated directly into the LNW785 providing

the circuit pack is equipped with one of the compatible PTMs listed in Table 8-3,

“Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19) .

Important!

The procedures in this section make two assumptions, the first is that the span between LNW785s is established while the second is that this is a new turn-up and not on an existing network.

LNW785/OC192

The LNW785 span is established and tested using the Procedure , “Turn-up and test the

LNW785 8-channel OMD” (p. 8-4)

. In some instances, only one direction may be added to the WDMX circuit pack. Main 1 is always referred to as the West direction, while Main

2 is the East

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Determine the direction of the Span, Main 1 or Main 2.

................................................................................................................................................

Install an OC-192 PTM in the assigned port slot in the Main circuit pack see

“Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19) .

Table 8-3,

Note:

Only the first 4 wavelengths can be used in the LNW141, PTMs X10G52C5 through X10G55C5.

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

................................................................................................................................................

Provision the PTM/OTU-2

Select Configuration > Equipment from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to Main 1 circuit pack to expand the list.

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight the PTM and click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Enter the Frequency in the Expected Frequency and click Apply, then Close.

Note:

The frequency is determined by the PTM inserted in Port 9. See the LNW785 column in

Table 8-3, “Channel/port assignments” (p. 8-19) for acceptable values.

................................................................................................................................................

Create OCH Cross-connections

Select Configuration > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Select the Create a new OCH cross-connection radio button in the OCH Cross-

Connection Wizard. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click the 2-way Add/Drop radio button from the cross-connection list. Click Next.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-15

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select and expand the circuit pack list by clicking the “+” next to Main 1, highlight

Port 1 OTU-2 and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the AID to highlight it then click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Click Select for the Add/Drop port, expand the circuit pack (OMD5/8) and click on the

Port (the port must match Main 1 OTU-2 port) and the port will appear on the right side of the screen, click on the AID to highlight it then click Select.

................................................................................................................................................

Connect the fibers from Main 1/Main2 PTM to the corresponding channel in the LNW785 while observing proper optical levels, fiber cleaning procedures and fiber routing in the shelf.

................................................................................................................................................

to Step 13 at the other end of the circuit.

Result:

Once both ends are completed the Mains should go into service and LOS alarms cleared between the nodes.

................................................................................................................................................

If configuring the other direction, repeat Step 1

to Step 13 .

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Highlight one of the OCH cross-connections from the list recorded in

Removing provisioning and equipage from the LNW785

Description

This section provides procedures on how to properly remove provisioning from the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf once testing is completed and the equipment/ports are no longer needed. Locate the procedure below to remove the equipment and return the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend back to the original status.

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Deleting the OCH cross-connection

................................................................................................................................................

CIT.

................................................................................................................................................

Retrieve OCH Cross-connections.

Select View > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to OMD5/8 circuit pack to expand the list.

................................................................................................................................................

Delete OCH Cross-connections

Select Configuration > OCH Cross-connections from the System View

................................................................................................................................................

Select the Delete an existing OCH cross-connection radio button in the OCH Cross-

Connection Wizard. Click Next.

................................................................................................................................................

Click the “+” next to OMD5/8 circuit pack to expand the list

................................................................................................................................................

Next.

Step 3 and click

................................................................................................................................................

Highlight All Legs and click Next, Finish, then Yes.

................................................................................................................................................

Repeat Step 5

through

Step 8 for all remaining OCH cross-connections recorded in Step 3

................................................................................................................................................

End the OCH cross-connection Wizard session by clicking Close.

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-17

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

Delete LNW785 circuit pack

................................................................................................................................................

Remove the LNW785 circuit pack from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

................................................................................................................................................

Update the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend inventory

Select Configuration > Update System > Update Inventory

................................................................................................................................................

Click Yes to acknowledge the request.

................................................................................................................................................

Check off the appropriate box in the

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Table 8-3 Channel/port assignments

Apparatus

Code

X10G52C5

X10G53C5

X10G54C5

X10G55C5

X10G56C5

X10G57C5

X10G58C5

X10G59C5

Channel

LNW705

9520

9530

9540

9550

9560

9570

9580

9590

LNW785

OCH

9520

9530

9540

9550

9560

9570

9580

9590

Frequency

195200 GHz

Table 8-4 Attenuation Table

Optics

OC-3 (high speed)

Circuit pack

LNW40

LNW140

LNW601

Received power

(dBM)

-8.0 to -28.0

0.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -34.0

0.0 to -18.0

LBO

(dB)

Low-speed optics (OC-48)

OC-12 (high speed)

OC-48 PTM

(pluggable transmission module) optics

LNW31 (OC-48)

LNW38

LNW51

LNW302

LNW380

-8.0 to -28.0

-8.0 to -30.5

TBS

-8.0 to -29.0

LNW382 TBS

LNW41/55/62 LR-1 Optics -9.0 to -27.0

LNW41/55/62 LR-2 Optics -9.0 to -28.0

LNW41/55/62 SR-1 Optics -3.0 to -18.0

........................................................................................................................................................................

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

8-19

WDMX setup and testing: integration procedures

........................................................................................................................................................................

Optics Circuit pack

Received power

(dBM)

LBO

(dB)

OC-192 VLF high speed PTM

(pluggable transmission module) optics

LNW141, LR-2 Optics +4.0 to 0.0

LNW141, IR-2 Optics

0.0 to -7.0

-7.0 to -24.0

+2.0 to -1.0

-1.0 to -14

PTM (pluggable transmission module)

Optics

OC-3 (high speed)

LNW141, SR-1 Optics -1.0 to -11.0

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 SR-1 -8.0 to -23.0

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 IR-1 -8.0 to -28.0

LNW37/45/55 OC-3 LR-1 0.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10

-10 to -34.0

-8.0 to -28.0

LNW49/55 OC-12

SR-1

LNW49/55 OC-12

IR-1

LNW49/55 OC-12 LR-1

-8.0 to -28.0

Circuit pack

LNW40

LNW140

+2.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -15

-15 to -28.0

Received power

(dBM)

-8.0 to -28.0

LBO

(dB)

........................................................................................................................................................................

8-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Part IV: Miscellaneous detailed installation procedure and reference material

Overview

Purpose

This section provides supplementary information that is useful when installing the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) system and using this Installation Manual.

This section is comprised of the following appendixes:

Appendix B, “Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation”

Appendix C, “Installing fiber connectors and LBOs”

Appendix D, “Backplane pin replacement”

Appendix E, “Fiber labeling”

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

IV-1

Miscellaneous detailed installation procedure and reference material

IV-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A Fiber cleaning

Overview

Purpose

This appendix describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for the cleaning and inspection of optical connectors using specific tools and materials that have been proven to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment. It is critical that connector faces are clean and free from particular contamination to assure proper performance and reliability of lightwave systems. With the modern high speed, high power, and wider bandwidth optical transmission systems, clean connectors along the optical path are essential for successful operation.

Contents

This appendix provides information on the following topics:

Equipment requirements and recommendations

Safety instructions

Cleaning/inspecting optical connectors

Cleaning pluggable optics module

A-2

A-3

A-9

Objectives

This chapter provides information to perform the following:

1. Properly clean an optical connector

2. Inspect an optical connector for cleanliness

3. Clean PTM optical modules.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A-1

Fiber cleaning

Related information

A course on connector cleaning and the connector inspection process is now offered through Alcatel-Lucent University, Course Code: LMC200H “Understanding Fiber Optic

Cleaning, Inspection and Testing.” To learn more about this course, consult your local

Alcatel-Lucent Account Representative.

Equipment requirements and recommendations

Description

For proper cleaning, the following equipment and materials are recommended:

Table A-1 Required and recommended equipment and materials

Product

Optical Fiber Scope

2.5mm Universal adapter cap

1.25mm Universal adapter cap

Video Fiber Scope

Individual presaturated alcohol wipes

CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette

CLETOP Cleaning

Cassette Replacement

Reel

Luminex Stick port cleaners

Luminex Cloth

Model/description Comcode ITE #

For use with the

Noyes OFS 300-200X

Installation order #

Noyes OFS 300-200X 408197028 ITE-7129

For use with the

Noyes OFS 300-200X

33712900

408197044 ITE-7129D1 33712901

408197069 ITE-7129D2 33712902

Noyes VFS-1

99% pure isopropyl alcohol

Type A Reel

TBD TBD

901375147 ITE-7136

901375154 ITE-7137

TBD

33713600

33713700

Type A Reel

1.25 mm

2.5 mm

5.5” x 5.5”

901375014

901375030

901375022

408201226

ITE-7137

ITE-7134

ITE-7135

R6033

33713701

33713400

33713500

23603300

A-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Fiber cleaning

Product Model/description Comcode ITE #

Installation order #

Notes:

1. This equipment may not be necessary at all locations. It is to be used when the ports need to be verified for cleanliness. If care is exercised when cleaning fibers, the video scope may not be needed.

Note:

The equipment and material listed above has been tested and is proven effective when used in conjunction with this procedure. Substitution of equipment or materials is at the discretion of the user and is not recommended.

Safety instructions

Safety warnings

WARNING

Laser hazard

Never view an energized optical cable with the naked eye or with an optical magnifying instrument. Disconnected or separated optical connectors may emit invisible laser radiation and direct exposure can severely injure the eye. If inspecting the endface of a connector with a fiberscope, be absolutely certain that the system is deactivated.

WARNING

Noxious substance hazard

Alcohol is flammable and is harmful if swallowed, inhaled or absorbed through the skin.

Keep alcohol away from heat, sparks, or flame. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothing.

Cleaning/inspecting optical connectors

Introduction

The procedure that follows utilizes the “Wet/Dry” method for connector cleaning. This method first applies a “wet” solvent such as high purity alcohol to the connector endface to dissolve/remove any organic particulate or oily films, followed by a “dry” double clean wipe using the CLETOP cleaning cassette.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A-3

Fiber cleaning

This procedure is recommended for connector ferrules 2.5 mm and 1.25 mm in diameter associated with ST, SC, FC, and LC connectors. The ferrule of a fiber optic connector consists of a ceramic or stainless steel cylinder with a hole located longitudinally down the center of its axis, allowing enough tolerance for a fiber to pass through.

All optical connectors should be cleaned prior to being connected. Keep the protective ferrule dust cap on the connector until initiating the cleaning process.

Cleaning procedure

The following cleaning procedure is acceptable for field service/installation activities:

Remove the dust cap from the connector ferrule, thus exposing the connector endface.

Open an individual foil packet of pre-saturated isopropyl alcohol (99% pure) wipe.

See

Figure A-1, “Cleaning the ferrule endface” (p. A-4) .

Grasp the connector housing and place the connector ferrule endface perpendicular to the alcohol wipe.

Drag it against the wipe three (3) times in a figure eight pattern. This action applies the alcohol solvent to the endface and initially loosens and scrubs away organic/solid contaminates.

Figure A-1 Cleaning the ferrule endface

If a CLETOP cassette cleaner is not available, proceed with Step 7 . Otherwise, hold the

CLETOP cassette cleaner in the palm of your hand with the cassette shutter door facing up. See

Figure A-2, “CLETOP cleaner” (p. A-5) .

A-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Fiber cleaning

Rotate the cassette lever all the way down with your thumb. Do not release the lever. The lever advances the “dry” Luminex cleaning cloth inside the case and simultaneously opens the shutter. The CLETOP cassette shutter door is now open and ready for cleaning the connector.

Figure A-2 CLETOP cleaner

Insert and press the connector ferrule endface perpendicular against the cleaning cloth in

the first of two slots of the cleaner. See Figure A-3, “Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning” (p. A-7)

Drag it down (in the direction indicated by the arrows on the cleaner). Make certain not to release the lever of the cassette.

Lift the connector from the first slot and rotate it 90 degrees and repeat the downward motion using the second slot. Be sure the ferrule is pressed snug against the cleaning cloth while dragging the ferrule to assure the proper cleaning action.

Release the cassette lever allowing the shutter door to close to its initial position. Continue

with Step 8 .

Wrap a Luminex cleaning cloth around the ferrule and rotate the connector housing, cleaning the outside periphery of ferrule.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A-5

Fiber cleaning

Follow this by folding an unused portion of the cloth over the end of the ferrule endface and then with light pressure from the thumb, slightly drag the cloth from the center of the ferrule to the edge while rotating the connector 360 degrees. If the Luminex cleaning cloth is not available, a lint free cleanroom optic wipe can be used. The Luminex cleaning cloth is washable and can be used multiple times, optic wipes are single use and disposable.

Inspect the connector for cleanliness. If necessary, repeat the cleaning process. See

“Connector inspection” (p. A-6) .

Connector inspection

After cleaning the connector, inspect the ferrule endface to ensure that it is free from any particulate contamination using an optical fiber inspection scope of at least 200X magnification. When using an optical fiber scope (for example, the Noyes OFS 300-200X) exercise extreme caution to assure fiber being examined is de-energized.

WARNING

When using an optical power meter to verify the connector and fiber to be cleaned, take special precaution to make sure that no power is being emitted from the fiber before viewing.

Follow the instructions in the manual provided with the Optical Fiber Scope to view the ferrule endface of the fiber under inspection.

The visual area of the ferrule endface (ferrule and fiber) as observed by the inspection

system/scope should be free of any contaminates. See Figure A-3, “Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning” (p. A-7)

A-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Fiber cleaning

Repeat the Cleaning procedure if the fiber endface does not meet the following requirements:

Requirement: No fixed type of contamination (contaminates that remain at the same location after 3 wet-dry cleaning cycles), regardless of size, is allowed in the restricted area of the glass fiber endface.

Requirement: The restricted area is defined as ~66 microns (µm) diameter for both singlemode and multimode fibers.

Requirement: No chips, cracks or scratches are allowed near the core of the glass fiber endface.

Requirement: No large floating (loose) contaminates are allowed on the glass fiber and ceramic ferrule endface.

Figure A-3 Acceptability criteria for fiber cleaning

Restricted Area

1/2 SM Core + 1/2 Fiber

Diameters - 66 µm dia.

No Loose or No Fixed

Contamination

Monitor

Viewing

Area

No LOOSE

contamination or particulate fibers in viewing area. If not removable in 3 cleaning attempts, it is defined as fixed particulate

core fiber

Fixed particles

(<8.0µm in size) allowed in this area.

66u m

After the connector has been verified to be cleaned, it should be immediately inserted into the adapter buildout of the optical component. This will assure maximum cleanliness and effectiveness of the connector.

If the cleaned connector can not be immediately connected to a corresponding adapter, the connector ferrule must be protected with a connector dust cap. Before placing the cap on the ferrule, make sure the cap is clean. This can be accomplished by inserting a CLETOP stick cleaner (swab) of the same inside diameter as the cap (either 2.5 or 1.25 mm) and rotating the stick 360 degrees three (3) times. Following this procedure, carefully place the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A-7

Fiber cleaning

cap over the ferrule. When the cleaned connector is ready for assembly, it should be reinspected for cleanliness prior to connection.

Fiber adapters or circuit pack connectors

During testing and/or trouble shooting activities it may be necessary to clean the optical buildout adapter or the circuit pack connector. The following procedure is recommended

CAUTION

Do not attempt to clean ports equipped with yellow Light guide BuildOut (LBO) attenuators. Attenuators contain a thin glass lens that is extremely fragile. The

LBO will be damaged if cleaned using this method.

Using the appropriate CLETOP stick cleaner (2.5 mm for SC, ST, and FC connectors, 1.25 mm for LC connectors) dampen the stick cleaner with Ethyl alcohol using the alcohol wipe. Insert the stick cleaner into the adapter rotating the stick 360 degrees while inserting. Push/rotate stick until the stick cleaner makes contact with the connector. Apply slight pressure upon contact and rotate stick 360 degrees at least three (3) times.

Remove the stick cleaner rotating it upon removal.

Using a dry CLETOP stick cleaner of appropriate diameter, repeat the above cleaning procedure. This procedure will clean the side walls of the adapter and the endface of the circuit pack connector.

Gently insert the Video Fiber Scope probe into the port until the fiber ferrule comes into view.

Verify that the fiber ferrule is clean. Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 if the fiber does not

meet the requirements specified in “Connector inspection” (p. A-6) .

A-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Fiber cleaning

Cleaning pluggable optics module

Purpose

This task describes the Alcatel-Lucent recommended method for cleaning pluggable optics modules using specific tools and materials that have been proven to be effective in the assembly and testing of optical transmission equipment.

Note:

Pluggable optics modules are shipped with a water-tight process plug installed into the optical ports to maintain cleanliness during storage and/or transportation. It is recommended that the process plug be kept in place to maintain cleanliness until the optical fiber is connected. With proper care and handling, cleaning the pluggable optics modules should not be necessary.Because a major source of contamination is often a contaminated mating connector, it is extremely important to clean the connector ferrule end surface each time before making connections.

Steps

Complete the following steps to clean a pluggable optics module.

Remove the protective process plug from the pluggable optics module. Keep the process plug clean until reinstalled later, if required.

CAUTION

Corrosive substance hazard

When performing this step hold the canned dry nitrogen or air upright. If the canned dry nitrogen or air is held upside down, inert gas may be released onto the connector surface. The inert gas leaves contamination on the connector surface that can not be removed.

While holding the canned dry nitrogen or air, position the tip of the nozzle extension as close as possible, but not close enough to make physical contact, to the sleeve inside the port receptacle and make three consecutive short blows (approximately one second each).

Repeat Step 2 for the other port.

Using the stereo zoom scope, visually inspect the optics module. If required, repeat

Step 2

up to two more times then go to the next step.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

A-9

Fiber cleaning

CAUTION

This step should only be performed on the transmit (TX) port if the air blows did not work. Do not perform this step on the receive (RX) port. The receive

(RX) port contains a lens for focusing a wide input. The lens is more easily scratched than cleaned.

If required, insert a CLETOP stick into the transmit (TX) port sleeve until vertical force can be applied to the fiber stub end surface. Rotate the CLETOP stick five full rounds.

Using the stereo zoom scope, visually inspect the optics module. If required, repeat

Step 4 .

CAUTION

It is recommended that the process plug be installed into the optical ports on the pluggable optics module to maintain cleanliness until the optical fiber is connected.

If required, reinstall the process plug into the optical ports to maintain cleanliness.

A-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B Pluggable Transmission

Module (PTM) installation

Overview

Purpose

This chapter describes the how to insert a Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) into a

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) circuit pack. These PTMs were once referred to as Small Form Programmable (SFP)s.

Contents

This chapter contains the following:

PTM modules

Install pluggable modules

B-2

B-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-1

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

PTM modules

Alcatel-Lucent approved Class 1 PTM transceivers

The following table lists all the current approved PTM modules to be used with Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

Table B-1 Alcatel-Lucent approved PTMs

Name

S15512

OC3LR1-I1

OC3IR1-I1

OC3X12X48-IR1-I1

OC3X12X48-LR1-I1

OC12IR1-I1

OC12LR1-I1

OC12LR2-I1

S622C47EL

S622C49EL

Optical module code/commode

OC3SR1-I1

109602599

OC3LR1-I1

109453886

OC3IR1-I1

109453894

OC3X12X48-IR1-I1

109708131

OC3X12X48-LR1-I1

109708149

OC12IR1-I1

109453902

OC12LR1-I1

109467522

OC12LR2-I1

109604447

109664086

109664094

Description

OC3 PTM TRCVR Short

Reach - SR1

OC3 PTM TRCVR Long

Reach - LR1

OC3 PTM TRCVR

Intermediate Reach IR1

Compatible circuit packs

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302

LNW55, LNW84 OC3/STM1/OC12/STM4/

OC48/STM16 SFP, 15km,

1310nm

OC3/STM1/OC12/

STM4/OC48/STM16,

40km, 1310nm

OC12 PTM TRCVR

Intermediate Reach IR1

OC12 PTM TRCVR Long

Reach LR1

OC12 PTM TRCVR Long reach, 1.5 LR-2 (80km),

1510 nm

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch47

1471nm SM

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch49

1491 nm SM

LNW55, LNW84

LNW49, LNW55

LNW84, LNW382

LNW49, LNW55

LNW84, LNW382

LNW49, LNW55

LNW84, LNW382

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

B-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Name

Optical module code/commode Description

Compatible circuit packs

S622C51EL 109664102

S622C53EL 109664110

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch51

1511nm SM

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch53

1531nm SM

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

S622C55EL 109664128

S622C57EL 109664136

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch55

1551nm SM

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch57

1571 nm SM

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

S622C59EL 109664144

S622C61EL

OC48SR1-I1

OM2.5G 1.3LR1

(OC48LR1-I1)

109664151

OC48SR1-I1

109564518

OC48LR1-I1

109493528

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch59

1691nm SM

OC3/12 622Mb/s Coarse

WDM (CDWDM) Ch61

1611nm SM

OC48 PTM TRCVR

Short Reach, 1.3 SR-1

(2km) 1310 nm

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

LNW37, LNW45

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW382

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

OC48 PTM TRCVR 1310

Long Reach LR1

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

OC48LR2-I1

OC192IR2-C1

OC192IR2-I1

OC192LR2-C1

OC192SR1-C1

OC48LR2-I1

109504431

OC192IR2-C1

109537563

OC192IR2-I1

109586479

OC192LR2-C1

109537555

OC192SR1-C1

109537902

OC48 PTM TRCVR 1550

Long Reach LR1

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW141 OC192 XFP SM IR2 (40 km) 1550 nm

OC192 XFP SM IR2 (40 km) 1550 nm

OC192 XFP SM LR2 (80 km) 1550 nm

LNW141

OC192 XFP SM SR1 (2 km) 1310 nm

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-3

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Name

Optical module code/commode Description

Compatible circuit packs

S2D23C6

S2D25C6

OC48 DWDM

109610378

OC48 DWDM

109610394

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

192.3 THz/1558.983 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

192.5 THz/1557.363 nm

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

S2D27C6

S2D31C6

OC48 DWDM

109610410

OC48 DWDM

109610451

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

192.7 THz/1555.747 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

193.1 THz/1552.524 nm

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

S2D33C6 OC48 DWDM

109610477

S2D35C6

S2D37C6

S2D45C6

S2D47C6

S2D49C6

S2D53C6

S2D55C6

OC48 DWDM

109610493

OC48 DWDM

109610519

OC48 DWDM

109610600

OC48 DWDM

109610626

OC48 DWDM

109610642

OC48 DWDM

109610691

OC48 DWDM

109610717

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

193.3 THz/1550.918 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

193.5 THz/1549.315 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

193.7 THz/1547.715 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

194.5 THz/1541.349 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

194.7 THz/1539.766 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

194.9THz/1538.186 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

195.3 THz/1535.036 nm

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

195.5 THz/1533.465 nm

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

B-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Name

Optical module code/commode Description

Compatible circuit packs

S2D59C6

X10G21C5

OC48 DWDM

1096104766

X10G21C5

109615005

OC48/STM16/OTU1

DWDM

195.9 THz/1530.334 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1560.606 nm

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402

LNW141

X10G22C5 109615013 LNW141

X10G23C5 109615021

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1559.794 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1558.983 nm

LNW141

X10G24C5 109615039 LNW141

X10G25C5

X10G26C5

X10G27C5

X10G28C5

X10G31C5

X10G33C5

X10G35C5

109615047

109615054

109615062

109615070

109615104

109615120

109615146

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1558.173 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1557.173 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1556.555 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1555.747 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1554.940 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1552.524 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1550.918 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1549.315 nm

LNW141

LNW141, LNW705

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-5

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Name

Optical module code/commode Description

Compatible circuit packs

X10G37C5 109615161 LNW141, LNW705

X10G45C5 109615245

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1547.715 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1541.349 nm

LNW141, LNW705

X10G47C5 109615260 OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1539.766 nm

LNW141, LNW705

X10G49C5

X10G52C5

X10G53C5

X10G54C5

X10G55C5

109615310

109615328

109615336

109615344

DWDM, Long Reach,

1538.186 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1535.822 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1535.036 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1534.250 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1533.465 nm

LNW141

X10G56C5

X10G57C5

X10G58C5

X10G59C5

109615351

109615369

109615377

109615385

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1532.681 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1531.898 nm

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1531.116 nm,

OC-192/STM-64/OTU2

DWDM, Long Reach,

1530.334 nm

LNW141

B-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Name

Optical module code/commode Description

Compatible circuit packs

OMFE 100BASE-LX-

GE-1X2XFC-LX-C1

(1000BASE-LX, 1Gbps and 2Gpbs Fibre-

Channel/

FICON

100BASE-LX-I1

109527812

GE-1X2XFC-LX-C1

109527804

100 Mb/s Optical FAST

Ethernet PTM TRCVR

GbE long-reach, Single

Mode PTM supports

Ethernet, FICON and

Fibre-Channel traffic, LCtype connectors

(GbE/FC/2FC/-1310)

LNW74, LNW87

LNW170

LNW64, LNW73,

LNW73C, LNW170

OM1G//OMFC

1000BASE-

SX//100/200-M5/M6-

SN-S

GE1X2XFC-SX-C1

109527796

1X FIBRE Channel or 2X

FIBRE Channel or Gbe

MM PTM TRCVR

LNW64, LNW73,

LNW73C, LNW170

OMESCON MMF ESCON-MM-I1

109523886

(1000BASE-SX, 1Gbps) GE-1X2XFC-SX-I1

109570606

ESCON MM PTM

TRCVR

GbE short-reach, Single-

Mode PTM, supports

Ethernet and Fibre-

Channel traffic, LC-type connectors, OSP hardened

(GbE/FC/2FC-850)

LNW73, LNW73C

LNW63, LNW64,

LNW73, LNW73C,

LNW170

(1000BASE-SX, 1Gbps) GE-1X2XFC-LX-I1

109568782

(1000BASE-ZX, 1Gbps)

BASE-T-C1 FE and GbE

(electrical- NOT OSP)

1000BASE-ZX-I1

109541862

109565549

GbE long-reach, Single-

Mode PTM, supports

Ethernet and Fibre-

Channel traffic, LC-type connectors, OSP hardened

(GbE/FC/2FC-850)

LNW63, LNW64,

LNW73, LNW73C,

LNW170

LNW63, LNW64,

LNW170

GbE Short-reach, Single-

Mode PTM, supports

Ethernet, LC-type connectors, and is OSP hardened (GbE-1550)

Electrical PTM, provisionable to 100 or

1000 Mbps, Lucent

Approved RJ-45 Cat 5-E cable, maximum span length of 100 meters

LNW63, LNW64,

LNW170

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-7

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Install pluggable modules

Task

Complete the following steps to install pluggable optical modules in a circuit pack that has already been installed in a shelf.

Determine the circuit pack and socket being equipped with the pluggable optical module.

Hold the optical connector/latch-end of the module in your left hand with the gold fingers facing you. The module should be positioned in manner similar to

Figure B-1, “Pluggable optics module” (p. B-8) .

Figure B-1 Pluggable optics module

MA-DMX-422

Note:

Do not remove the dust plug unless you are ready to connect fibers or if you need to clean the module.

Referring to Figure B-2, “Module types” (p. B-9)

, determine the type of latching mechanism on the pluggable optical module purchased.

B-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Figure B-2 Module types

Gold Fingers

Port

Gold Fingers

Port

Gold Fingers

MA-DMX-445

Gold Fingers

Port

Gold Fingers

Port

Gold Fingers

MA-DMX-439

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-9

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Port

Gold Fingers

Port

Gold Fingers

MA-DMX-442

Important! Pluggable optical modules are shipped with a dust plug installed into the optical ports to maintain cleanliness during storage and/or transportation. It is recommended that the dust plug be kept in place to maintain cleanliness until the optical fiber is connected. With proper care and handling, cleaning the pluggable optical modules should not be necessary.

Referring to Step 3

, determine which type of PTM is provided.

if...

Type 1 or 2

Type 3

Type 4

Then...

Proceed to

Continue with

Proceed to

Step 8

Before inserting the module, the latch must be in the closed position.

B-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Before inserting the module, the latch must be in the closed position. With the dust plug in place, the latch is in the closed position. Remove the dust plug momentarily to open the latch. Move the latch to the left (away from the gold fingers) to open the latch.

Figure B-3 Latch type 3

Proceed to

Figure B-3, “Latch type 3”

Before inserting the module, the latch must be in the closed position. With the dust plug in place, the latch is in the closed position. Remove the dust plug momentarily to open the latch. Move the latch to the right (towards the gold fingers) to open the latch.

Figure B-4 Latch type 4

With your left hand, hold the optical module by the dust plug. The optical ports are in your left hand and the gold fingers are visible (facing you). (Do not insert optical module).

Rotate the optical module 45 degrees counter-clockwise. The dust plug is facing you and the gold fingers are pointed to the right. (Do not insert optical module.)

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-11

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Insert the pluggable optical module in the required socket of the circuit pack faceplate.

Confirm that the optical module is locked in the socket. Verify that all unused sockets on the circuit pack ar equipped with dust covers.

Result:

The port appears in the WaveStar

CIT System View indicating successful installation. If response is not correct, replace the optical module. If the optical module fails when inserted, and another optical module in the shelf fails at the same time, replace the newly-installed optical module. Each optical module has unique internal data for warranty purposes. If this data for any reason is not unique, both optical modules with the duplicated information will be declared failed. See the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (DMXtend) User Operations Guide, 365-372-

325.

B-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Referring to

Step 3

, what type of latching mechanism does your module have?

if...

Type 1 or 2

Type 3

Type 4

then...

The latch automatically catches when the module is inserted. The module is secure.

Move the latch to the right (towards the gold fingers) to close the latch The Module is secure. See

(p. B-11) .

Move the latch to the left (away from the gold fingers) to close the latch. The module is secure. See

Figure B-4, “Latch type 4”

(p. B-11) .

Cable routing for electrical PTMs

This procedure describes how to route electrical PTMs comcode 109565549 cables in a

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf.

Insert the PTM module in ports 1 through 4 of the LNW170 card.

If fiber PTMs are used they will occupy ports 5 through 8.

Connect the RJ-45 connectors to ports 1 through 4.

Route the CAT-5 cable in a manner so that two cables connect through the LNW170 slot

opening and two are routed into the protection slot opening. See Figure B-5 below.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

B-13

Pluggable Transmission Module (PTM) installation

Figure B-5 Electrical PTM routing

B-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

C Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

Overview

Purpose

This appendix provides procedures for installing and removing Line Build Out units

(LBOs) and fiber connectors onto input and output ports found on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) optical circuit packs.

Contents

This chapter provides information on the following topics:

LBOs

Attenuation for circuit packs and PTMs

Objectives

•

This appendix provides information to perform the following:

Install and remove LC-type LBOs onto and from LC-type ports.

Install and remove LC-type fiber connections.

Fiber cleaning

See Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

for fiber cleaning information. Do not attempt to clean

LBOs as they may be damaged by a cleaning attempt. Discard suspect LBOs and replace with a new unit.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

C-1

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

LBOs

General

LBOs are fixed-value optical attenuators that mate into mounting blocks and provide a specific connector interface (LC, ST, FC or SC-type) for external fiber connections. The

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend optical circuit packs are equipped with LC-type connector ports designed for use with LC-type LBOs and fiber connectors. Dust caps should be applied on all LBOs when not installed in connector ports.

LC-type connector port

The LC-type connector port will only accept LC-type LBOs for external fiber connection.

Figure C-1 LC-type connector ports on circuit pack

LC-type LBO

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend utilizes Alcatel-Lucent’s state-of-the-art AllWave

ADVANTAGE™ Fiber Optic Attenuators. These attenuators reduce optical power from the transmitter that can result in over-saturation of the receiver, have low reflection to meet stringent system requirements, and are backward-compatible with existing transmission systems. Unique to the AllWave ADVANTAGE™ optical connectivity solution (OCS), the

C-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

new LC™ optic attenuators are designed to provide flat spectral loss across the full spectrum, allowing the attenuators to be used in the 1300-nm, 1400-nm, and 1500-nm bands.

Figure C-2 LC-type LBO

SNAP-ACTION TAB

ALIGNMENT KEY

Assembly of LC-type LBO into LC block

The LC-type LBOs are installed into the LC-type connector by aligning the alignment key with the slot in the connector port and pushing the LBO into the port until it snaps into place.

Figure C-3 LC-type LBO inserted into LC-type connector port

ALIGNMENT

SLOT

15-dB LBO

Removal of LC-type LBO from LC block

The LC-type LBOs are removed from the LC-type connector port by depressing the tab to release the LBO and then pulling straight out.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

C-3

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

Figure C-4 Removing LC-type LBO from LC-type connector port

DEPRESS TAB

TO RELEASE LBO

Attenuation for circuit packs and PTMs

Table C-1 Circuit pack attenuation table

Optics

OC-3 (high speed)

Circuit Pack

LNW40

LNW140

LNW601

OC-12 (high speed)

Low-Speed

Optics (OC-48)

LNW38

LNW51

LNW380

LNW31

Received Power

(dBM)

-8.0 to -28.0

0.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -34.0

-8.0 to -28.0

-8.0 to -30.5

-8.0 to -29.0

0.0 to -18.0

LBO

(dB)

C-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

Table C-2 PTM attenuation table

PTM optics

S155I2

OC3IR1-I1

OC3LR1-I1

OC12IR1-I1

Circuit Pack

LNW37, LNW45,

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW705

LNW37, LNW45,

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW705

LNW37, LNW45,

LNW55, LNW84,

LNW302, LNW705

Received

Power (dBM)

-8.0 to -23.0

-8.0 to -28.0

0.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10

-10 to -34.0

-8.0 to -28.0

LBO

(dB)

OC12LR1-I1

LNW49, LNW55,

LNW84, LNW382,

LNW705

LNW49, LNW55,

LNW84, LNW382,

LNW705

OC12LR2-I1

OC48SR1-I1

LNW49, LNW55,

LNW84, LNW382,

LNW705

+2.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -15

-15 to -28.0

+2.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -15

-15 to -28.0

-3.0 to -18.0

OC48LR1-I1

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402, LNW705

LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402, LNW705

OC48LR2-I1 LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW402, LNW705

+3.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -27.0

+3.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -27.0

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

C-5

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

PTM optics Circuit Pack

Received

Power (dBM)

LBO

(dB)

OC3X12X48-

IR1-I1

LNW55, LNW84 (OC-3) 0 to -18.0

LNW55, LNW84 (OC-

12/48)

0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

OC3X12X48-

LR1-I1

-10.0 to -18.0

LNW55, LNW84 (OC-3) +3.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -15.0

OC192IR2-I1

OC192SR1-C1

OC192IR2-C1

LNW55, LNW84 (OC-

12/48)

LNW141, LNW705

-15.0 to -27.0

+3.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -20.0

+2.0 to -1.0

-1.0 to -11

+2.0 to -1.0

OC192LR2-C1 LNW141, LNW705

-1.0 to -14

+4.0 to 0.0

0.0 to -7.0

-7.0 to -24.0

+5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -29.0

S622CxxEL LNW37, LNW45,

LNW49, LNW55,

LNW84, LNW302,

LNW382, LNW705

S2DxxC6 series LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW202, LNW402,

LNW705

S2G7CxxLI LNW41, LNW55,

LNW62, LNW84,

LNW202, LNW402

+3.0 to -5.0

-5.0 to -10.0

-10.0 to -15.0

-15.0 to -27.0

0 to 8.0

-9.0 to -24.0

C-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

PTM optics Circuit Pack

Received

Power (dBM)

LBO

(dB)

X10GxxC5

* series

LNW141, LNW705 -8.0 to -24 15

Notes:

* LNW705 only uses X10G31C5-X10G49C5

Table C-3 LBOs based on attenuation

Code

ABLCS-05.0

ABLCS-10.0

ABLCS-15.0

ABLCS-20.0

Comcode

108279381

108279431

108279480

108279530

Loss (dB)

Fiber connections

General

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend uses AllWave ADVANTAGE™ Lightguide Jumpers, part of

Alcatel-Lucent’s AllWave ADVANTAGE™ Optical Connectivity Solution (OCS). These jumpers contain a boot angled at 40 degrees, allowing the jumpers to dress appropriately into the fiber tray. The angled boot eliminates projection outside the front of the shelf assembly.

All fiber connectors should be cleaned and inspected before assembling into connector

ports. See Appendix A, “Fiber cleaning”

. Dust caps should be applied to all fiber connectors when not installed in a connector port.

LC-type connections

LC-type fiber connectors use a snap-action, lever-tab locking method to join the fiber connector to the port connector.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

C-7

Installing fiber connectors and LBOs

Figure C-5 LC-type fiber connector

ALIGNMENT KEY SNAP-ACTION TAB SNAP-ACTION LEVER

The LC-type fiber connector is assembled onto an LC-type connector port of a circuit pack or LC-type LBO by aligning the alignment key with the slot in the connector port and pushing the connector into the port until it snaps into place.

The LC-type fiber connector is removed from a connector port by depressing the snapaction lever to disengage the fiber connector.

Figure C-6 LC-type fiber connection

ALIGNMENT

SLOT

DEPRESS LEVER

TO RELEASE THE

SNAP-ACTION TAB

C-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

D Backplane pin replacement

Overview

Purpose

This appendix provides information and the procedures used when a connector and/or pin on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend) backplane has been bent or broken.

Contents

This appendix provides information on the following topics:

Pin and connector background

Repair kits and tools

Simple repair methods

Objectives

•

This appendix provides information and procedures to do the following:

Identify a bent or broken pin

Determine the correct replacement pin and pin kit

Straighten bent pin

Replace broken pins

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

D-1

Backplane pin replacement

Pin and connector background

Description

This section describes the procedures for the repair/replacement of the press-fit connector pins used on the backplane of the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf. Trouble clearing procedures may lead you to inspect the backplane for damaged connectors.

Circuit packs are plugged into METRAL™ signal pin connectors which have been pressfit into the backplane. A plastic shroud is included with the connectors to protect the pins.

The signal pin press-fit terminals in these connectors my be replaced individually if they have been damaged beyond simple repair methods.

D-subminiature connectors

Interface cabling to and from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves is connected through D-Subminiature connectors which have been press-fit into the backplane. Should these connectors be damaged beyond simple repair methods, contact your next level of support for the replacement procedure.

RJ45 jacks

Interface cabling to and from the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves is connected through RJ45 connectors (jacks) which have been press-fit into the backplane. Should these jacks be damaged beyond simple repair methods, contact your next level of support for the replacement procedure.

Shelves and backplanes

The Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend has its connectors and terminal identifiers stenciled on the back surface for identification of location or position. The stenciling can only be seen when the back cover is removed.

Pins are identified by a column and row position on the backplane. D-Subminiature connectors are identified by their designation and J-number. All the METRAL™ pins used on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves have the same tail length of 4.30 mm (0.169 in.).

D-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Backplane pin replacement

Table D-1 show the location and type of METRAL™ pins on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend backplane.

Table D-1 Backplane locations of METRAL™ pins

Row Column Type

001, 154, 156, 162 GND Signal Pin

Mating length

(mm)

5.75

001, 154, 156, 162 a, b, d, g Signal Pin 8.00

All others All others Signal Pin 5.75

Tail length

(mm)

4.30

Repair kits and tools

Repair kits

•

For the repair or replacement of METRAL™ signal pins, use one of the following repair kits:

Berg Electronic MT370-01 Shelf Level Press-Fit Repair Kit

IMDARC R-6004 Metral™ Pin Repair Kit - Comcode 407959881

This kit includes the tools, parts and instructions for repair and replacement of signal pins.

Replacement pins

Replacement pins are available. These pins are defined by the mating length extending beyond the inside of the plastic shroud and by their tail length for press-fitting into the backplane. The tail length includes a compliant press-fit section needed to achieve a gastight connection in four contact areas. All the METRAL™ pins used on the Alcatel-

Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelves have the same tail length of 4.30 mm (0.169 in.).

Additional replacement signal pins may be ordered in packages of 100 by the part number

shown in Table D-2, “Metral™ pins” (p. D-3) .

Table D-2 Metral™ pins

Type

Ground

Signal Pin

Mating length (mm) Berg part #

5.75

88929-502

5.75

8.00

88929-502

88929-519

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

D-3

Backplane pin replacement

Simple repair methods

Precautions

CAUTION

Equipment Damage/Personal Injury

These procedures should be done with the shelf out of service and powered down to ensure no further damage to the equipment or to the person doing the repair. If service cannot be removed or rerouted, contact your next level of support before proceeding.

CAUTION

ESD hazard

Proper ESD precautions must be followed.

Make sure that you have adequate space to access the backplane area and that you have good light sources so that you can see what you are doing.

Visual examination

Visually examine the connector pins to determine which pins may have been damaged and the degree of the damage. Pins that have been slightly bent may be carefully restored to their initial straight position. Examine both sides of the backplane to determine if the press-fit termination has been disturbed. These pins depend on an undisturbed interference fit between the terminal body and the plated-through hole in the backplane to create a reliable connection.

If the visual examination suggests that the connector pins are loose or are damaged beyond repair, replace the connector pin.

D-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Backplane pin replacement

METRAL™ backplane pins

CAUTION

Equipment Damage

This is a delicate procedure. Take your time to gently straighten the pin in several small steps. Large movements may damage adjacent pins.

Follow the instructions and use the tools provided in the MT370-01 Shelf Level Press-Fit

Repair Kit to straighten METRAL

pins which may have been bent out of position.

Guide pins and keying pins

If a stainless steel guide pin or keying pin has been bent out of alignment, attempts to straighten it may damage the backplane. The recommended alternative is to replace the bent pin.

D-subminiature pins

The D-Subminiature connectors on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane are all of the receptacle type. These connectors are designated as jacks and not as plugs. The individual connector terminals are protected somewhat by the molded plastic insert inside the connector shell. It is unlikely that these terminals would be bent in the manner that the exposed pin terminals of a plug might be bent. The damage concern for these receptacle terminals is that they may be “crushed” or otherwise distorted out of shape. Attempts to

“straighten” these terminals may result in fracturing them. If a receptacle terminal has been damaged to the extent that the mating plug connector cannot be connected, then the recommended alternative is to replace the entire backplane.

RJ45 jacks

The RJ45 connectors (jacks) are press-fitted into the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane. Should these jacks be damaged beyond simple repair methods, contact your next level of support for the replacement procedure.

Replacement methods

Background

Connector pins are designed to withstand a considerable removal force. An impact-type tool is used to generate a controlled removal force. Similarly, proper insertion of a press-fit connector pin is done with an impact-type tool to control the insertion forces and not damage adjacent pins.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

D-5

Backplane pin replacement

Precautions

Read the following Important statements before proceeding:

Note:

Any press-fit connector pin may be removed and replaced one time in the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend backplane. A second removal and replacement in the same plated-through hole may not meet the long-term reliability objectives. If a replacement is needed for a previously replaced connector pin, contact your next level of support before proceeding.

Note:

Protect the surrounding area from any debris which may be generated during the pin removal and replacement.

Steps

Verify that the problem cannot be fixed using a simple repair procedure.

Secure the proper tool kit.

Read the tool kit instructions before beginning.

Plan and write out a “Method of Procedure” specific to your location.

Follow the instructions provided to remove the damaged pin.

Install the replacement pin.

Verify that the new pin is securely in the backplane.

If the replacement is not successful, contact your next level of support.

D-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Backplane pin replacement

Guide and keying pin procedure

If it becomes necessary to replace Guide or Keying Pins, contact your next level of support for tooling, replacement parts and detailed replacement procedures. The replacements will need to installed with screws and washers.

D-subminiature pin procedure

If it becomes necessary to replace either the D-Subminiature pins or connector, contact your next level of support for detailed replacement procedures.

RJ45 jacks

If it becomes necessary to replace a RJ45 connector, contact your next level of support for the replacement procedure.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

D-7

Backplane pin replacement

D-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

E Fiber labeling

Overview

Purpose

This appendix describes the labeling of the fiber.

Contents

This chapter contains the following:

Fiber description

Fibers

There are three different types of single-mode fiber used with the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

Data Multiplexer Extend (Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend), simplex blue fiber, simplex yellow fiber, and the customer's fiber, and two types of multi-mode fiber used with the

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, multi-mode simplex gray fiber and the customer's multimode fiber.

Blue fiber

Blue fiber is made up of a single blue colored fiber equipped with LC connectors at both ends. It is referred to as Simplex LC Blue Fiber. The Blue Fibers are custom cut to length for their application. The length is given on the protection boot of the LC connector.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

E-1

Fiber labeling

Gray fiber

Blue fiber is made up of a multi-gray colored fiber equipped with LC connectors at both ends. It is referred to as Multi-mode LC Gray Fiber. The Gray Fibers are custom cut to length for their application. The length is given on the protection boot of the LC connector.

Yellow fiber

Simplex fibers are Yellow in color and come in six different lengths (15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and

50 feet), as well as custom lengths.

Outside fiber

Outside fiber is the fiber connecting the Customer equipment to the Alcatel-Lucent 1665

DMXtend. Depending on the customers specifications, these fibers may be any combination of SC, FC, or ST connectors. The length of these fibers depends on the system interface setup. This fiber is usually referred to as the Outside Bay or Plant Fiber.

Outside Bay Fiber management should be specified by the customer. It is beyond the scope of this document to specify the route or dressings that the fiber should take once it leaves the equipment bays.

E-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Fiber labeling

Precautions

CAUTION

Fiber Damage

Fiber is constructed of glass and should be treated with care. It should not be pulled or stretched. This could cause damage to the fiber or the fiber connector.

Fiber should not be bent in a radius of less than 1-1/2”.

Single-mode fiber testing requirements

•

All fibers should be tested after they are installed as follows:

All fibers should be tested after installation, but prior to turn-up

•

Before fibers are tested, they should be labeled properly and all cable tags should be removed.

A 1310-nm or 1550-nm test source and an ITE# 7116 (or equivalent) optical power meter should be used to perform all tests.

The light source shall first be measured for a reference point/baseline.

No fiber jumper may have a measured loss of more than 2 dB.

Fiber labels

Introduction

•

If pre-printed labels are not available, use a label-maker to create labels for each end of each fiber. The label should include:

Rack location

Circuit pack

Port

Direction (IN,OUT)

Labeling the fibers

To apply the labels to the connectors, use the following procedure.

Remove the appropriate label from the backing sheet or the label maker.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

E-3

Fiber labeling

Apply the label to the strain relief boot, close to the body of the LC connector.

Adhere the end of the label with the printed text first.

The label must be oriented perpendicular to the main axis of the connector.

Wrap the label around the boot so that the second wrap is directly on top of the first wrap.

(The label will wrap around the boot approximately two times). The text is printed diagonally on the label so that it can be read when applied the correct way.

Note:

Do not apply the label diagonally to the boot. The label must wrap directly on top of itself for the adhesive to work.

E-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

ABN

Abnormal (status condition)

ACO

Alarm Cutoff

ACO/SW

Alarm Cutoff and Test

ADM

Add/Drop Multiplexer

AGNE

Alarm Gateway Network Element

AIS

Alarm Indication Signal

AMI

Alternate Mark Inversion

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

APS

Automatic Protection Switch

ARM

Access Resource Manager

AS&C

Alarm, Status, and Control

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASN.1

Abstract Syntax Notation 1

ASNE

Alarm Server Network Element

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-1

Glossary

Auto

Automatic

AUXCTL

Auxiliary Control

B3ZS

Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution

B8ZS

Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution

BDFB

Battery Distribution and Fuse Bay

BER

Bit Error Ratio

BIP

Bit Interleaved Parity

BITS

Building Integrated Timing Supply

BRI

Basic Rate Interface

Clear Channel

CCITT

International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee

CEV

Controlled Environment Vault

CD-ROM

Compact Disk, Read-Only Memory

CDTU

Channel and Drop Test Unit

CIT

Craft Interface Terminal

CLF

Carrier Line Failure Status

1-2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

CLK

Clock

CMISE

Common Management Information Service Element

CMOS

Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor

CMTS

Cable Modem Termination System

Central Office

Circuit Pack

CPE

Customer Premises Equipment

Critical (alarm status)

CSA

Carrier Serving Area

CSU

Channel Service Unit

CS&O

Customer Support and Operations

CRN

Customer Release Notes

Coding Violation

CVFE

Coding Violation Far End

DCC

Data Communications Channel

DCE

Data Communications Equipment

DEMUX

Demultiplexer

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-3

Glossary

DLC

Digital Loop Carrier

DPLL

Digital Phase-Locked Loop

DRI

Dual Ring Interworking

DS1

Digital Signal Level 1

DS3

Digital Signal Level 3

DSLAM

Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DSNE

Directory Services Network Element

DSX

Digital Cross-Connect Panel

Distant Terminal

DTE

Data Terminating Equipment

EC-1

Electrical Carrier Level 1

ECI

Equipment Catalog Item

EEPROM

Electrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EIA

Electronic Industries Association

EMC

Electromagnetic Compatibility

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference

EOOF

Excessive Out of Frame

1-4

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

EPROM

Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

Equipped (memory administrative state)

Errored Seconds

ESD

Electrostatic Discharge

ESF

Extended Super Frame

EST

Environmental Stress Testing

FCC

Federal Communications Commission

FDDI

Fiber Distribution Data Interface

Far End

FE ACTY

Far End Activity

FEBE

Far End Block Error

FE ID

Far End Identification

FEPROM

Flash EPROM

FERF

Far End Receive Failure

FE SEL

Far End Select

FIT

Failures in 10

-9

hours of operation.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-5

Glossary

GbE

Gigabit Ethernet

GNE

Gateway Network Element

Telcordia Technologies General Requirement

GTP

General Telemetry Processor

GTSIP

Global Technical Support Information Platform

GUI

Graphical User Interface

HECI

Humans Equipment Catalog Item

Internal Clock

Identifier

IEC

International Electrotechnology Commission

IMF

Infant Mortality Factor

INC

Incoming Status

I/O

Input/Output

Internet Protocol

Intermediate Reach

1-6

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

In Service

ISCI

Intershelf control Interface

ISI

Intershelf Interface

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISO

International Standards Organization

ISP

Internet Service Provider

IVHS

Intelligent Vehicle Highway System

LAN

Local Area Network

LAPD

Link Access Procedure "D"

LBO

Line Build Out

LCN

Local Communications Network

LEC

Local Exchange Carrier

LED

Light-Emitting Diode

LOF

Loss of Frame

LOP

Loss of Pointer

LOS

Loss of Signal

Long Reach

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-7

Glossary

Low Speed

Mediation Device

Major Alarm

Multimode

MML

huMan-Machine Language

Minor Alarm

MPEG

Moving Picture Experts Group

MSDT

Multi-Services Distant Terminal

MTBF

Mean Time Between Failures

MTBMA

Mean Time Between Maintenance Activities

Mult

Multipling

MUX

Multiplex

MXBIU

Multiplexer and Backplane Interface Unit

Near End

Network Element

NE ACTY

Near-End Activity

1-8

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

NEBS

Network Equipment-Building System

Nanometer (10

-9

meters)

NMA

Network Monitoring and Analysis

NMON

Not Monitored (provisioning state)

NRZ

Nonreturn to Zero

NARTAC

Lucent North American Regional Technical Assistance Center call 1-866-LUCENT8 (866-582-3688): Prompt 1

NNI

Network-Network Interface

NSA

Not Service Affecting

NSAP

Network Services Access Point

NTF

No Trouble Found

OAM&P

Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning

OC-1

Optical Carrier Level 1 Signal (51.84 Mb/s)

OC-3

Optical Carrier Level 3 Signal (155 Mb/s)

OC-12

Optical Carrier Level 12 Signal (622 Mb/s)

OC-48

Optical Carrier Level 48 Signal

OLIU

Optical Line Interface Unit

OOF

Out of Frame

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-9

Glossary

OOL

Out of Lock

OPS/INE

Operations System/Intelligent Network Element

Operations System

OSGNE

Operations System Gateway Network Element

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection

OSMINE

Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of Network Elements

OSP

Outside Plant

P-bit

Performance Bit

Personal Computer

PCU

Power Conversion Unit

PID

Program Identification

PINFET

Positive Intrinsic Negative Field Effect Transistor

PJC

Pointer Justification Count

PLL

Phase-Locked Loop

Performance Monitoring

PMN

Power Minor Alarm

POH

Path Overhead

1-10

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

POP

Points of Presence

POTS

Plain Old Telephone Service

PRM

Performance Report Message

PROTN

Protection

PRS

Primary Reference Source

PSU

Power Supply Unit

PTM

Pluggable Transmission Module

PVC

Permanent Virtual Circuit

PWR

Power

RAM

Random Access Memory

RPP

Reliability Prediction Procedure (described in Telcordia Technologies TR-NWT-00032)

Remote Terminal

Return to Zero

Service Affecting

SCADA

Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

Signal Degrade

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-11

Glossary

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SEFS

Severely Errored Frame Seconds

SEO

Single-Ended Operations

SES

Severely Errored Seconds

Super Frame (format for DS1 signal)

SFP

Small Form Programable.

SID

System Identification

SLA

Service Level Agreements

SLIM

Subscriber Loop Interface Module

Single Mode

SONET

Synchronous Optical NETwork

SPE

Synchronous Payload Envelope

SQU

Sync Quality Unknown

STS, STS-n

Synchronous Transport Signal

STM

Synchronous Transfer Mode

STS-1 SPE

STS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope

STS-3c

Synchronous Transport Level 3 Concatenated Signal

STS-12c

Synchronous Transport Level 12 Concatenated Signal

1-12

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Glossary

SYSCTL

System Controller (circuit pack)

T1X1 and T1M1

The ANSI committees responsible for telecommunications standards

Telcordia Technologies Technical Advisory

TABS

Telemetry Asynchronous Byte Serial (Protocol)

TARP

Target ID Address Resolution Protocol

TCA

Threshold-Crossing Alert

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TCVCXO

Termperature-Compensated Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator

TDM

Time Division Multiplexing

TID

Target Identifier

TL1

Transaction Language 1

TLB

Timing Looped Back

TOP

Task Oriented Practice

Telcordia Technologies Technical Requirement

TSA

Time Slot Assignment

TSI

Time Slot Interchange

TSO

Technical Support Organization

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-13

Glossary

UAS

Unavailable Seconds

UNI

User Network Interface

UOC

Universal Optical Connector

UPD/INIT

Update/Intialize

UPSR

Unidirectional Path Switched Rings

Voice Frequency

VLAN

Virtual Local Area Network

VLSI

Very Large Scale Integration

Violation Monitor

VMR

Violation Monitor and Removal

VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol

VONU

Virtual Optical Network Unit

VPN

Virtual Private Network

Virtual Tributary

VT1.5

Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s)

VT-G

Virtual Tributary Group

1-14

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

WAN

Wide Area Network

Terms and definitions

0x1

Set up using unswitched cross connections on UPSR Ring Interfaces.

1+1

The 1+1 protection switching architecture protects against failures of the optical transmit/receive equipment and their connecting fiber facility. One bidirectional interface (two fibers plus associated

OLIUs on each end) is designated "service," and the other is designated "protection." In each direction, identical signals are transmitted on the service and protection lines ("dual-fed"). The receiving equipment monitors the incoming service and protection lines independently, and selects traffic from one line (the "active" line) based on performance criteria and technician/OS control. In

1+1 both service and protection lines could be active at the same time (service in one direction, protection in the other).

1xN, 1x1

1xN protection switching pertains to circuit pack protection that provides a redundant signal path through the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend (it does not cover protection switching of an optical facility; se "1+1"). In 1xN switching, a group of N service circuit packs share a single spare protection circuit pack. 1x1 is a special case of 1xN, with N=1. In 1x1 only one is active at a time.

Active

Active identifies a 1+1 protected OC-N line which is currently selected by the receiver at either end as the payload carrying signal or a 1x1 or 1xN protected circuit pack that is currently carrying service. (See Standby).

AGNE - Alarm Gateway Network Element

A defined NE in an alarm group through which members of the alarm group exchange information.

AIS - Alarm Indication Signal

A code transmitted downstream in a digital network that shows that an upstream failure has been detected and alarmed.

AMI - Alternate Mark Inversion

A line code that employs a ternary signal to convey binary digits, in which successive binary ones are represented by signal elements that are normally of alternating, positive and negative polarity but equal in amplitude, and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements that have zero amplitude.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-15

Terms and definitions

ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange

A standard 8-bit code used for exchanging information among data processing systems and associated equipment.

Auto

One possible state of a service interface port. In this state, the port will automatically be put "in service" if a good incoming signal is detected on the port.

Automatic Protection Switch

A feature that allows another synchronization source to be automatically selected and the synchronization source provisioning to be automatically reconfigured in the event of a synchronization source failure or network synchronization change, for example, a fiber cut.

Available Time

In performance monitoring, the 1-second intervals.

B3ZS - Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution

A line coding method that replaces a string of three zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic.

B8ZS - Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution

A line coding method that replaces a string of eight zeros with a sequence of symbols having some special characteristic.

Backbone Ring

A host ring.

BER - Bit Error Ratio

The ratio of bits received in error to the total bits sent.

BIP - Bit Interleaved Parity

A method of error monitoring over a specified number of bits, that is BIP-3 or BIP-8.

BITS - Building Integrated Timing Supply

A single clock that provides all the DS1 and DS0 synchronization references required by clocks in a building.

Broadband

Any communications channel with greater bandwidth than a voice channel; sometimes used synonomously with wideband. Also refers to signals at the DS3 (44.736 Mb/s) and higher.

Wideband refers to lower rates (i.e. DS1, VT1.5, etc.).

CC - Clear Channel

A provisionable mode for the DS3 output that causes parity violations not to be monitored or corrected before the DS3 signal is encoded.

1-16

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

CCITT - International Telephone and Telegraph Consultative Committee

An international advisory committee under United Nations’ sponsorship that has composed and recommended for adoption worldwide standards for international communications. Recently changed to the International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Standards Sector

(ITU-TSS).

Channel

A logical signal within a port. For example, for an EC-1 port, there is one STS-1 channel and sometimes 28 VT1.5 channels. See Port.

Channel State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to suppress reporting of alarms and events during provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service and not monitored) for VT1.5 and STS-1 channels.

See Port State Provisioning.

CV - Coding Violation

A performance monitoring parameter.

CVFE - Coding Violation Far-End

An indication returned to the transmitting terminal that an errored block has been detected at the receiving terminal.

DACS III-2000

Digital Access and Cross-Connect System that provides clear channel switching at either the DS3 or the STS-1 rates, eliminating the need for manual DSXs.

DACS IV-2000

Digital Access and Cross-Connect System that provides electronic DS3/STS-1 or DS1/VT1.5 cross-connect capability, eliminating the need for manual DSXs.

DCC - Data Communications Channel

The embedded overhead communications channel in the SONET line. It is used for end-to-end communications and maintenance. It carries alarm, control, and status information between network elements in a SONET network.

DCE - Data Communications Equipment

In a data station, the equipment that provides the signal conversion and coding between the data terminal equipment (DTE) and the line. The DCE may be separate equipment or an integral part of the DTE or of intermediate equipment. A DCE may perform other functions usually performed at the network end of the line.

DDM-2000

Lucent’s first generation SONET multiplexers that multiplex DS1, DS3, or EC-1 inputs into EC-1,

OC-1, OC-3, or OC-12 outputs.

Default Provisioning

The parameter values that are preprogrammed as shipped from the factory.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-17

Terms and definitions

Demultiplexing

A process applied to a multiplexed signal for recovering signals combined within it and for restoring the distinct individual channels of these signals.

DEMUX - Demultiplexer

The DEMUX direction is from the fiber toward the DSX.

Digital Multiplexer

Equipment that combines time-division multiplexing several digital signals into a single composite digital signal.

DRI - Dual Ring Interworking

Two ring networks interconnected at two common nodes.

Drop and Continue

A technique that allows redundant signal appearances at two central offices in a DRI network, allowing protection against central office failures.

DS1

Digital Signal Level 1 (1.544 Mb/s).

DS1(28) Circuit Pack

The DS1(28) circuit pack interfaces to the DSX-1 panel.

DS3

Digital Signal Level 3 (44.736 Mb/s).

DS3/EC-1 Circuit Pack

The DS3/EC-1 circuit pack interfaces to the DSX-3 panel.

DSn - Digital Signal Rate n

One of the possible digital signal rates at Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend interfaces: DS1 (1.544

Mb/s) or DS3 (44.736 Mb/s).

DSX - Digital Cross-Connect Panel

A panel designed to interconnect to equipment that operates at a designated rate. For example, a

DSX-3 interconnects equipment operating at the DS3 rate.

DTE - Data Terminating Equipment

That part of a data station that serves as a data source (originates data for transmission), a data sink

(accepts transmitted data) or both.

Dual Homing

A network topology in which two Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtends serve as hosts supporting up to

8 OC-3 rings or 4 OC-12 rings. Each OC-3 and OC-12 ring is interconnected between the two separate hosts.

1-18

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

EC-1, EC-n - Electrical Carrier

The basic logical building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an EC-1 signal and a rate of n times 51.840 Mb/s for an EC-n signal. An EC-1 signal can be built in two ways: A DS1 can be mapped into a VT1.5 signal and 28 VT1.5 signals multiplexed into an EC-1 (VT1.5 based EC-1) or a DS3 can be mapped directly into an EC-1 (DS3 based EC-1).

ECI - Equipment Catalog Item

The bar code number on the faceplate of each circuit pack used by some inventory systems.

ES - Errored Seconds

A performance monitoring parameter.

ESF - Extended Super Frame

The format for a DS1 signal.

FE - Far End

Any other network element in a maintenance subnetwork other than the one the user is at or working on. Also called remote.

FE ACTY - Far End Activity

An LED on the SYSCTL circuit pack faceplate.

FEBE - Far End Block Error

An indication returned to the near-end transmitting node that an errored block has been detected at the far end.

FEPROM - Flash EPROM

Nonvolatile Electrically-erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory.

FERF - Far End Receive Failure

An indication returned to the transmitting terminal that the receiving terminal has detected an incoming section failure.

FE SEL - Far End Select

An LED on the faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

FIT

Failures in 10

-9 hours of operation.

Free Running

An operating condition of a clock in which its local oscillator is not locked to an internal synchronization reference and is using no storage techniques to sustain its accuracy.

FT-2000

Lucent’s SONET OC-48 Lightwave System.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-19

Terms and definitions

Function Unit

Refers to any one of a number of different circuit packs that can reside in the A/B, D, or G function unit slots on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend.

GNE - Gateway Network Element

A network element that has an active X.25 link. Can also be a DSNE.

Hairpin Routing

A cross-connection between function units (inter-function unit). For example, function unit C to function untis A, B, or D. Also, a cross-connection within the same function unit (intra-function unit). Cross-connections go through Main, but no bandwidth or time slots are taken from the backbone ring. Eliminates need for another shelf.

Holdover

An operating condition of a network element in which its local oscillator is not locked to any synchronization reference but is using storage techniques to maintain its accuracy with respect to the last known frequency comparison with a synchronization reference.

IC - Internal Clock

Used in synchronization messaging.

See shelf ID and site ID.

IR - Intermediate Reach

A term used to describe distances of 15 to 40 km between optical transmitter and receiver without regeneration. See long reach.

IS - In Service

One possible state of a DS1, DS3, or EC-1 port. Other possible states are "auto" (automatic) and

"nmon" (not monitored).

Jitter

Timing jitter is defined as short-term variations of the significant instants of a digital signal from their ideal positions in time.

1-20

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

LBO - Line Build Out

An equalizer network between the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend and the DSX panel. It guarantees the proper signal level and shape at the DSX panel.

LED - Light Emitting Diode

Used on a circuit pack faceplate to show failure (red) or service state. It is also used to show the alarm and status condition of the system.

Line Timing

The capability to directly derive clock timing from an incoming OC-N signal while providing theuser the capability to provision whether switching to an alternate OC-N from a different source

(as opposed to entering holdover) will occur if the OC-N currently used as the timing reference for that NE becomes unsuitable as a reference. For example, intermediate nodes in a linear network are line timed. See Loop Timing.

Local

See Near-End.

Locked Cross-Connection

This is a variation of the ring cross-connection that allows the user to lock the path selector to a specified rotation of the ring. Any signal received from the other rotation of the ring is ignored.

LOF - Loss of Frame

A failure to synchronize to an incoming signal.

Loop Timing

Loop timing is a special case of line timing. It applies to NEs that have only one OC-N interface.

For example, terminating nodes in a linear network are loop timed. See Line Timing.

LOP - Loss of Pointer

A failure to extract good data from an STS-1 payload.

LOS - Loss of Signal

The complete absence of an incoming signal.

LR - Long Reach

A term used to describe distances of 40 km or more between optical transmitter and reciever without regeneration. See Intermediate Reach.

Main

The two slots (M-1 and M-2) on the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend shelf in which the OC-3 or OC-

12 main OLIU circuit packs are installed.

Midspan Meet

The capability to interface between two lightwave terminals of different vendors. This applies to high-speed optical interfaces.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-21

Terms and definitions

Multiplexing

The process of combining several distinct digital signals into a single composite digital signal.

Mult - Multipling

The cascading of signals in a bay. In the MULT mode, the DS1 external reference can be cascaded to other shelves in a bay using Mult cables. Normally starting with the bottom shelf (Number 1) and working towards the top of the bay.

NE - Near End

The network element the user is at or working on. Also called local.

NE - Network Element

The basic building block of a telecommunications equipment within a telecommunication network that meets SONET standards. Typical internal attributes of a network element include: onr or more high- and low-speed transmission ports, built-in intelligence, synchronization and timing capability, and access interfaces for use by technicians and/or operation systems. In addition, a network element may also include a time slot interchanger.

NE ACTY - Near End Activity

An LED on the faceplate of the SYSCTL circuit pack.

NMA - Network Monitoring and Analysis

An operations system designed by Telcordia Technologies which is used to monitor network facilities.

NMON - Not Monitored

A provisioning state for equipment that is not monitored or alarmed.

Node

In SONET, a node is a line terminating element.

Non-Revertive

A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment remains in its current configuration after any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur clear or after any external switch commands are reset. See Revertive.

NSAP - Network Services Access Point

An address that identifies a network element. Used for maintenance subnetwork communication using the OSI protocol.

OC, OC-n - Optical Carrier

The optical signal that results from an optical inversion of an STS signal; that is, OC-1 from

STS-1 and OC-n from STS-n.

1-22

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

OC-1

Optical Carrier Level 1 Signal (51.844 Mb/s).

OC-3

Optical Carrier Level 3 Signal (155 Mb/s).

OC-3c (STS-3c)

Optical Carrier Level 3 Concatenated Signal. Low-speed broadband equivalent to three STS-1s linked together with a single path overhead.

OC-12

Optical Carrier Level 12 Signal (622 Mb/s).

OC-12c (STS-12c)

Optical Carrier Level 12 Concatenated Signal. High-speed broadband equivalent to twelve STS-1s linked together with a single path overhead.

OC-48

Optical Carrier Level 48 Signal.

Operations Interface

Any interface that provides information on the system performance or control. These include the equipment LEDs, SYSCTL faceplate, and office alarms.

OS - Operations System

A central computer-based system used to provide operations, administration, and maintenance functions.

OSI - Open Systems Interconnection

Referring to the OSI reference model, a logical structure for network operations standardized by the

Internation Standards Organization (ISO).

OSGNE - Operations System Gateway Network Element

An OSGNE serves as a single interface to the OS for NEs in the same subnetwork using X.25 interfaces.

Pass Through

Paths that are cross-connected directly across an intermediate node in a ring network.

Plesiochronous Network

A network that contains multiple maintenance subnetworks, each internally synchronous and all operating at the same nominal frequency, but whose timing may be slightly different at any particular instant. For example, in SONET networks, each timing traceable to their own Stratum 1 clock are considered plesiochronous with respect to each other.

PM - Performance Monitoring

Measures the quality of service and identifies degrading or marginally operating systems (before an alarm would be generated).

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-23

Terms and definitions

Port

The physical, electrical, or optical interface on a system. For example, DS1, DS3, EC-1, OC-3, OC-

12, and OC-48. See Channel.

Port State Provisioning

A feature that allows a user to supress alarm reporting and performance monitoring during provisioning by supporting multiple states (automatic, in-service, and not monitored) for low-speed ports. See Channel State Provisioning.

Proactive Maintenance

Refers to the process of detecting degrading conditions not severe enough to initiate protection switching or alarming, but indicative of an impending signal fail or signal degrade defect (for example, performance monitoring).

Protection Line

As defined by the SONET standard, the protection line is the pair of fibers (one transmit and one receive) that carry the SONET APS channel (K1 and K2 bytes in the SONET line overhead). On a

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend, a protection line is a pair of fibers that terminate an OLIU circuit pack in the Main-2, D-2, or G-2 slots. See Service Line.

Product Family 2000

Lucent’s first line of SONET standard network products providing total network solutions.

PTM

Pluggable Transmission Module optics.

Reactive Maintenance

Refers to decting defects/failures and clearing them.

Remote

See Far-End (FE).

Revertive

A protection switching mode in which, after a protection switch occurs, the equipment returns to the nominal configuration (that is, the service equipment is active, and the protection equipment is standby) after the clearing of any failure conditions that caused a protection switch to occur or after any external switch commands are reset. See Non-Revertive.

Ring

A configuration of nodes comprised of network elements connected in a circular fashion. Under normal conditions, each node is interconnected with its neighbor and includes capacity for transmission in either direction between adjacent nodes. Path switched rings use a head-end bridge and tail-end switch. Line switched rings actively reroute traffic over a protection line.

RPP - Reliability Prediction Procedure

Described in Telcordia Technologies TR-NWT-00032.

1-24

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

RT - Remote Terminal

An unstaffed equipment enclosure that may have a controlled or uncontrolled environment.

Self-Healing

Ring architecture in which two or more fibers are used to provide route diversity. Node failures only affect traffic dropped at the failed node.

SEO - Single-Ended Operations

The maintenance capability that provides remote access to all Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend systems from a single location over the DCC.

Service Line

On a Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend system, a service (or "working") line is a pair of fibers (one transmit and one receive) that terminate on an OLIU circuit pack in the Main-1, D-1, or G-1 slots.

As defined by the SONET standard, the SONET APS channel is not defined on a service line. See

Protection Line.

SES - Severely Errored Seconds

This performance monitoring parameter is a second in which a signal fail occurs, or more than a preset amount of coding violations (dependent on the type of signal) occurs.

SF - Super Frame

The format for DS1 signals.

Shelf ID

A switch-settable parameter with values from 1 to 8. Used to log into a selected shelf by using the

CIT.

Single 0x1 Cross-Connection

In a dual-homed application, the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend uses a single 0x1 cross-connection to map the VT1.5 channels between the DDM-2000 FiberReach, OC-3 Multiplexer, or OC-12

Multiplexer and the Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend rings. This single 0x1 architecture maps low speed to high speed on a specified ring rotation. The high speed to low speed drop is made on the same specified ring with no path switching. Protection is provided at the VT1.5 end points.

Single Homing

A network topoly in which a single Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend serves as a DDM-2000

FiberReach, OC-3 Multiplexer, or OC-12 Multiplexer host supporting up to eight OC-3 or four OC-

12 rings.

Standby

Standby identifies a 1+1 protected OC-N line which is not currently selected by the receiver at either end as the payload carrying signal, or 1x1 or 1xN protected circuit pack that is not currently carrying service. See Active.

Status

The indication of a short-term change in the system.

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-25

Terms and definitions

STS, STS-n - Synchronous Transport Signal

The basic building block signal with a rate of 51.840 Mb/s for an STS-1 signal and a rate of n times

51.840 Mb/s for an STS-n signal.

STS-1 SPE - STS-1 Synchronous Payload Envelope

A 125-microsecond frame structure composed of STS path overhead and the STS-1 payload.

STS-3c

Synchronous Transport Level 3 Concatenated Signal. See OC-3c.

Subnetwork

Group of SONET network elements that share a SONET data communications channel.

Synchronization Messaging

SONET synchronization messaging is used to communicate the quality of network timing, internal timing status, and timing states throughout a subnetwork.

SYSCTL - System Controller

The system controller circuit pack that provides overall administrative control of the terminal.

T1X1 and T1M1

The ANSI committees responsible for telecommunications standards.

TCA - Threshold Crossing Alert

A condition set when a performance monitoring counter exceeds a user-selected threshold. A TCA does not generate an alarm but is available on demand through the CIT and causes a message to be sent to NMA via the X.25/TL1 interface.

TL1 - Transaction Language 1

A Telcordia Technologies machine-to-machine communications language that is a subset of ITU-

TSS, formerly CCITT’s, human-machine language.

UAS - Unavailable Seconds

In performance monitoring, the count of seconds in which a signal is declared failed or, in which,

10 consecutively severely errored seconds (SES) occurred, until the time when 10 consecutive non-

SES occur.

1-26

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Terms and definitions

Unidirectional

A protection switching mode in which the system at each end of an optical span monitors both service and protection lines and independently chooses the best signal (unless overridden by an equipment failure or by an external request, such as a forced switch or lockout). In a system that uses unidirectional line switching, both the service and protection lines may be active simultaneously, with one line carrying traffic in one direction and other line carrying traffic in the other direction. For a 1+1 protection scheme the K1 and K2 bytes in the SONET line overhead are used to convey to the far end which line the near-end receiver has chosen, so that an "active" indication may be made at the far end.

UOC - Univeral Optical Connector

Receptacles on the faceplate of some OLIUs that accept ST, SC, or FC connectors.

UPD/INIT

A push-button on the SYSCTL faceplate.

VM - Violation Monitor

A mode of the DS3 circuit pack in which it will monitor but not remove P-bit parity violations on the DS3 signal from the received fiber.

VMR - Violation Monitor and Removal

A mode of the DS3 circuit pack in which it will monitor and remove P-bit parity violations on the

DS3 signal received from the fiber.

VT - Virtual Tributary

A structure designed for transport and switching of a sub-DS3 payload.

VT1.5

A 1.728 Mb/s virtual tributary.

VT-G - Virtual Tributary Group

A 9-row by 12-column SONET structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more VTs of the same size.

Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte-interleaved within the VT-organized STS-1 synchronous payload envelope

Zero Code Suppression

A technique used to reduce the number of consecutive zeros in a line-codes signal (B3ZS for DS3 signals and B8ZS for DS1 signals).

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

1-27

Terms and definitions

1-28

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Index

.............................................................................

10/100Base-T cables

3-36

1000Base-T optical fiber cables

3-63

110/RJ45® punch down block

3-36

.............................................................................

Accessible Emission Limits

(AEL)

Alarm Cut-Off (ACO)

alarm panel

alarm reporting

alarm status indications user settable

alarm(s) critical (CR)

default delay time

environmental

fan shelf

LED

major (MJ)

minor (MN)

office

Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

Automatic

7-12

automatic protection switch

6-43

.............................................................................

battery distribution fuse board

(BDFB)

bay frame ground

bipolar 8 zero substitution

(B8ZS)

BITS clock

.............................................................................

cable(s)

10/100Base-T

3-36

1000Base-T

3-63

1000Base-T optical fiber optical fiber

1000Base-T

CIT

CIT interface

discrete cables

DS1

DS1 color codes

DS3/EC-1

DS3/EC-1 cable connections

environmental

IAO LAN/TCP-IP

miscellaneous discrete

modem

OC-3

OC-48

OC-48 optical fiber

office alarm

office alarm connections

optical fiber

power

power cable

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

I N - 1

SYNC

cabling checklist

power

central office (CO)

circuit packs

1G SX (LNW67)

CIT interface cable

serial port

software

CIT Interface Cable

CIT interface cable

CLETOP cleaning cassette

coaxial wire stripper

commands

connectors

DB-15 pinouts

DB-25 pinouts

DB-62 pinouts

DB-9 pinouts

pinouts

RJ-45 pinouts

crimping tool

critical alarm (CR)

cross-connect tests

cross-connects

VT1.5

Index

.............................................................................

...........................................................................

DB-15 connector pinouts

fan alarm

LBO

DB-25 connector pinouts

LBO Table

DB-62 connector pinouts

3-5

DB-9 connector pinouts

3-5

FDA/CDRH

1-1

21 CFR 1040.10 and

1040.11

1-1

LC Block

C-3

LC-type connector port

C-2

FDA/CDRH regulations

1-9

discrete

LC-type fiber connectors

DS1 cable assemblies

fiber cleaning

acceptable criteria

function group

LED

ACTIVE

FAULT

function unit

DS1 error rate test set

LGX

...........................................................................

line coding

DS1 timing reference

3-49

DS3 error rate test set

G ground

bay frame

LNW42

local equipment tests

DS3/EC-1 cables

DSX

DSX cabling

...........................................................................

IAO LAN/TCP-IP cabling

3-41

IEC

60825-1

1-1

Luminex Stick port cleaners

...........................................................................

M major alarm (MJ)

IEC requirements

.............................................................................

...........................................................................

minor alarm (MN)

EIA-type bay frame network bay frame

1-3

EIA-type

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) environmental alarm

jumper(s) optical fiber

...........................................................................

miscellaneous discrete

modem

cable

modem cable

, mult office alarms

environmental discrete

ESD damage

labels laser safety

Laser

multimeter

...........................................................................

electronic components

jack

laser classes

optical specifications

1-10

product classifications

1-9

N network bay frame seismic

Network Equipment Building

System (NEBS)

wrist strap

Extended superframe (ESF)

external buffer relay

radiation

safety

laser radiaition

laser radiation

...........................................................................

O OC

3-61

OC-3 optical fiber cables

3-61

3-62

OC-48

I N - 2

Alcatel-Lucent 1665 DMXtend R9.1

365-372-327R9.1 Issue 1

November 2011

Index

optical fiber cables

office alarm

alarm(s) office

cable

connections

mult

relay contacts

test

office alarm cable

office alarm panel

ohmmeter

optical attenuators

optical fiber scope

out-of-service mode

laser instructions standards

SYNC cable

3-48

cable(s)

SYNC

laser warning labels

screwdriver(s)

seismic network bay frame

serial port

3-64

single-mode fiber

3-58

Pacific Bell Equipment

Framework Standard PBS-

000-102PT

Superframe (SF)